Home

C70 Specifications Manual

1. NC Analyzer lt Function gt Waveform measurement function Ethernet Frequency response measurement Frequency response measurement of machine Measurement function with program creation function Automatic adjustment function Program creation Initial notch filter setup Velocity loop gain adjustment Time constant adjustment Position loop gain adjustment Lostmotion adjustment Lostmotion 3 adjustment Environment setup Communication path setup Parameter setup Measures the frequency response speed command speed FB of speed loop for the designated axis The result will be presented as Bode diagram Measures the frequency response torque command speed FB of machine system for the designated axis The result will be presented as Bode diagram Measures the Time series data measurement Circular error measurement Synchronous tapping error measurement Arbitrary path measurement Create
2. 172 45 SKIP MPG TERMINAL 1 gt 6 1 9 1 gt 2 n RIO1 5 9 O i 7 i e DIN Rail DCI DC24Y RG 12V SG FG 1000S Lo OO gt o 2 4 5 6 Connector for CNC CPU Not used Terminal block for power supply Used for the 12V power supply type manual pulse generator Connector for skip signal IN SKIP1 IN SKIP2 1 So 6 IN SKIP3 T 5 ee 9 D SUB 9pin SKIP 1 SKIP I F specification Input ON voltage 18V or more to 25 2V or less Input ON current 6mA or more Input OFF voltage 4V or less Input OFF current 2mA or less Input signal holding time Ton 2ms or more Internal response time 0 08ms or less SKIPCOM 1 SKIP2 SKIPCOM2 SKIP3 SKIPCOM3 SKIP4 Note NC recognizes input signals of 2ms or more as the valid skip signals If machine contacts relay etc are used malfunctions will occur due to SKIPCOM4 i chattering Use semiconductor contacts transistor etc 53 2 General Specifications 2 8 Signal Splitter 5 MPG 5V 12V Connector for manual pulse generator in Jai JW IN HBi 1 loo lo An HA2 st 98 Wn e E T in Haz EE 98 lin es o2 45 E EN 8 O 8 D SUB 15pin
3. Il 70 9 Tool Compensation 9 3 Tool Offset Amount 9 3 Tool Offset Amount 9 3 1 Number of Tool Offset Sets The number of tool compensation sets is as follows lt M system gt Number of part systems 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part Number of tool system system system system system system system compensation sets 40 sets 80 sets co toosets a a lt ases a Note 1 The number of tool compensation sets in above table indicates the number of sets in each part system Note 2 The standard number of tool compensation sets per part system for M system is 40 regardless of number of part systems lt L system gt Number of part systems 1st part 2nd part 3rd part Number of tool system system system compensation sets ses sss o o o tosets o ases Note 1 The number of tool compensation sets per part system for L system is 80 regardless of number of part systems 9 3 1 2 40 Sets M system O L system 9 3 1 3 80 Sets M system A 80 100 L system O 9 3 1 4 200 Sets M system A L system Il 71 9 Tool Compensation 9 3 Tool Offset Amount 9 3 2 Offset Memory 9 3 2 1 Tool Shape Wear Offset Amount M system O L system O This function registers the tool shape offset and wear offset amounts Compensation may encompass two or more axes 1 Shape offse
4. 12 3 High speed and High accuracy Functions 12 3 High speed and High accuracy Functions 12 3 5 High Accuracy Control 1 G61 1 M system A L system A This function controls the operation so the lag will be eliminated in control systems and servo systems With this function improved machining accuracy can be realized especially during high speed machining and machining time can be reduced The high accuracy control is commanded with G61 1 High accuracy control ON Effects in G02 G03 circular interpolation Machining path with a feed forward gain of 70 in high accuracy control mode Commanded path Machining path with a feed forward gain of 0 in high accuracy control mode Machining path when high accuracy control mode is OFF R Command radius mm AR Radius error mm F Cutting feed rate m min 1 Acceleration deceleration before interpolation Neat machining of sharp corners without waste is realized with optimum linear acceleration deceleration and corner judgement Optimum corner deceleration A Conventionally Conventionally Optimum corner deceleration T By accelerating decelerating before interpolation the machining shape error can be eliminated with smoothing and a highly accurate path can be achieved With the arc commands the radius reduction error can be significantly minimized Furthermore since constant inclination acceleration deceleration is performed the t
5. 131 5 Circular Error Radius Compensation gt PA pp Aa y e 13 1 6 Ball Screw Thermal Expansion Compensation A At 13 2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation 19 13 2 1 Smooth High gain SHG Control O O o t s 132 2 Dual Feedback Oo y O por 13 2 3 Lost Motion Compensation tO 14 Automation Support Functions gt S S S o on 141 Measurement aa HAC tt MA At 14 112 Multiple step Skip At MAA POR Oo A Yoo A pora 14 1 2 Automatic Tool Length Measurement A At 141 3 Manual Tool Length Measurement At 14 2 Tool Life Management oo 8 1421 Tool LifeManagement S e 1421 1 ToolLifeManagementh S Aa y A y e 14 242ToolLifeManagement S Aa e A y e 142 2 Number of Tool Life Management Sets Pt MEE o o S Aa ATC 14222100Sets S Aa S ATC CATS G S A 14 3 1 Programmable Current Limitation O PO o f to 143 101 PLC Axis Current it OO Ts 15 Safety and Maintenance 8 15 1 Safety Switches 8 15 1 1 Emergency Stop 8 151 2 Data Protection Key 81 15 2 Display for Ensuring Safety 882 15 2 1NC Warming Sao o te 15 2 2NC Alarm Sao o te 15 2 3 Operation Stop Cause OOO po o te 15 2 4 Emergency Stop Cause OOOO poo te 15 25 Thermal Detection OOOO poo te 15 2 6 Battery AlarmWarning Oo poo te 15 2 101 Insulation Degradation Monitor A884 15 3 Protection E EE A 15 3 1 Stroke End Over Travel A o OS O 185 15 3 2 Stored Stroke Limit 885 153 21 Stored Stroke Limit M oo po Oo f e 153 22 Stored Stroke LimitIB A 88 153 23 Stored Stroke LimitIB
6. 5V manual pulse generator 12V manual pulse generator HD60C UFO 01 2Z9 input conditions input conditions Input pulse signal type HA1 and HB1 phases with phase difference 90 Refer to the waveform below Aue anal aliada H level 3 5V to 5 25V ere 2 L level OV to 0 5V Max input pulse requency 5kHz e o power supply voltage SVDC 10 SVDC 10 urrent consumption 100mA or less Number of pulses per rotation 100 pulse rev 25 pulse rev HA1 HB1 HB1 HA1 a b c d e HA1 or HB1 rising edge falling edge phase difference T 4 T 10 T HA1 or HB1 cycle Min 10us Signal Splitter CNC CPU HA1 HA2 HA3 Signal input HB1 HB2 HB3 12V Note 12V 12V 12V 5V Power 5V 5V Power output output Note 12V power is separately required to connect 12V manual pulse generator Refer to 4 9 Connecting the Manual Pulse Generator 6 TERMINAL Not used 54 2 General Specifications 2 9 Manual Pulse Generator 2 9 Manual Pulse Generator UFO 01 2Z9 5V manual pulse generator 100 pulse rev lt Outline dimension gt Index Gasket 3 M4 stud Panel cut diameter 72 at equal pitch Above size only lt Panel cut drawing gt 3 04 8 at equal pitch Produced by NIDEC NEMICON CORPORATION 55 2 General Specifications 2 9 Manual Pulse Generator HD60C 12V manual pulse generator 25 pulse rev lt Outline dimension
7. Trademarks MELDAS MELSEC EZSocket EZMotion iQ Platform MELSOFT GOT CC Link CC Link LT and CC Link IE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and or other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and Windows are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the United States and or other countries Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies AR fh D ENE LM DO LT AA Japanese ASmIt LRA 9 TA A EMIR ar CT Moca IM RAE CO RIEL EARRA T DERE RMELLUIELETFO Handling of our product English This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Aza A sal TH SHA 9 Korean amu ATS S a ANAL a E 0 AS FAS lt o a a 1711143 7499 490 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using MITSUBISHI CNC 1 Warranty Period and Coverage Should any fault or defect hereafter called failure for which we are liable occur in this product during the warranty period we shall provide repair services at no cost t
8. lt Write window gt Write control command E or Write data i Parameters Tool data Write result lt 4 Variable data Max 20 windows 1 PLC sets the Write control command with the information of the CNC internal data where the data is written into and sets the data to be written to the Write data After setting turns the write control signal ON 2 CNC receives the control signal and writes the data designated in the Write data into the CNC internal data designated in the Write control commana 3 CNC sets the write status and errors to the Write result II 224 17 Machine Support Functions 17 4 PLC Interface 17 4 4 External Search M system A L system A This function enables searching of the program to automatically start from the PLC The program No block No and sequence No can be designated In addition the currently searched details can be read II 225 17 Machine Support Functions 17 6 External PLC Link 17 6 External PLC Link 17 6 3 CC Link Master Slave M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Refer to manuals of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC Q series for information on the function and the performance 17 6 4 PROFIBUS DP Master M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Refer to manuals of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC Q series for information on the function and the performance 17 6 5 DeviceNet Master M system A MELSEC L system
9. A MELSEC Refer to manuals of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC Q series for information on the function and the performance 17 6 6 FL net M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Refer to manuals of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC Q series for information on the function and the performance 17 6 7 CC Link LT M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Refer to manuals of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC Q series for information on the function and the performance 17 6 8 CC Link IE M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Refer to manuals of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC Q series for information on the function and the performance 17 6 101 ASi M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Refer to manuals of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC Q series for information on the function and the performance II 226 17 Machine Support Functions 17 7 Installing S W for Machine Tools 17 7 Installing S W for Machine Tools 17 7 3 EZSocket I F Need to purchase separate S W M system O L system O This middleware makes it easy to develop applications having a Windows interface The various functions of the NC unit can be used from a Windows application using VC language VB language and VBA macro language 17 7 4 APLC release Need to purchase separate S W M system A L system A APLC Advanced Programmable Logic Controller release is a function that allo
10. CNC gt PLC System State 24 hours continuous operation Dual signal unconfirmed after compare error Output OFF check not complete Power shutoff notification SKIPO Input signal state SKIP1 Input signal state SKIP2 Input signal state SKIP3 Input signal state Controller ready completion servo ready completion Door open enable In spindle synchronization Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion Spindle phase synchronization completion Chuck close confirmation Battery warning Battery alarm NC alarm 1 NC alarm 2 Servo alarm In door interlock Macro single valid Power OFF required after parameter change Edited data in processing Edited data error NC data sampling completed ATS varid Download in progress Download completed Download error PLC axis position switch 1 PLC axis position switch 2 PLC axis position switch 3 PLC axis position switch 4 PLC axis position switch 5 PLC axis position switch 6 PLC axis position switch 7 PLC axis position switch 8 PLC axis position switch 9 PLC axis position switch 10 PLC axis position switch 11 PLC axis position switch 12 PLC axis position switch 13 PLC axis position switch 14 PLC axis position switch 15 PLC axis position switch 16 APLC input signal 1 32 Axis State Servo ready Axis selection In axis plus motion In axis minus motion 1st reference position reached 2nd reference position reached 3rd reference position reached 4th reference position reached Near reference p
11. Display of state alarm code with 3 digits 2 SW1 Rotary switch for maintenance usually set to 0 3 SW2 Rotary switch for maintenance usually setto 0 4 SW Not used 44 2 General Specifications 2 5 CNC CPU Module 5 EMG Connector for the emergency stop signal input Min Jemacom 1 5566 02A 210 EMGCOM MOLEX Input type Current sinking sourcing Insulation method Photocoupler insulation Input voltage 24VDC 10 15 ripple ratio within 5 OFF voltage current 17 5VDC or more 3 0mA or less ON voltage current 1 8VDC or less 0 18mA or less Input resistance Approximate 10k Response time OFF gt ON or ON gt OFF 1ms Applicable size of wire 0 3mm Note The emergency stop function suits Stop category 1 of European safety standard EN60204 1 6 DISPLAY I F Connector for display GOT on Oo bb OQ ND 7 CN1 Connector for servo spindle drive unit 8 RIO Connector for Dual signal module a IN OUT RXTXH E J IN OUT RXTXL 3 ll sav 9 AC FAIL Not used 45 2 General Specifications 10 MPG Connector for 5V manual pulse generator OUT IN Hato OUT _ sG ov SS ES FG 53426 0610 MOLEX Input pulse signal type Max input pulse frequency 5kHz Number of pulses per rotation 100pulse rev Input signal voltage Power voltage for pulse generators 5VDC 10 Max output curren
12. G30 P2 2nd reference point return G30 P3 3rd reference point return G30 P4 4th reference point return The G30 programming format is given below G30 Xx1 Yy1i Zz1 Ppl G30 Return command Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Return control axes interim point Pp1 Return position No The tool is first positioned by rapid traverse to the interim point commanded for the assigned axis and then is returned independently to the reference point 2nd reference point l 1st reference point Start oer Interim point 3rd reference point 4th reference point Note 1 The second reference point return is performed if the P address is omitted Note 2 The number of axes for which reference point return can be performed simultaneously depends on the number of simultaneously controlled axes Note 3 If atthe time of the reference point return the tool radius compensation has not been canceled it will be temporarily canceled by the movement up to the interim point The compensation is restored by the next movement command after the return Note 4 If atthe time of the reference point return the tool length offset has not been canceled it will be canceled and the offset amount also cleared upon completion of reference point return The tool length offset can also be canceled temporarily using a parameter In this case however the tool offset is restored by the next movement command Note 5 Whether interpolation or non interpolation i
13. The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed using the machining programs The format used for the data setting is shown below G10 L70 Data setting command P parameter No S part system No A axis No HO data Bit parameter P parameter No S part system No A axis No D data Numerical value parameter P parameter No S part system No A axis No lt character string gt Character string parameter P parameter No S part system No A axis No character string Character string parameter Data setting end command Note 1 The sequence of addresses in a block must be as shown above When the same address is commanded more than twice the last command will be valid Note 2 The part system No is set in the following manner 1 for 1st part system 2 for 2nd part system and so forth If the address S is omitted the part system of the executing program will be applied As for the parameters common to part systems the command of part system No will be ignored Note 3 The axis No is set in the following manner 1 for 1st axis 2 for 2nd axis and so forth If the address A is omitted the 1st axis will be applied As for the parameters common to axes the command of axis No will be ignored Note 4 Address H is commanded with the combination of the bit designation O 0 to 7 and setting data 0 or 1 Note 5 Only the decimal number can be commanded with the address D The value that is smaller than t
14. ia interrupt Operation O O Oooo SS ESE S 11 42 Automatic Operation Handie Interrapton gt o o 11 4 Manual Absolute Switch OO 11 4 Thread Cutting Oyele React A 145 Tapping React OO 11 45 Manual Numerical Value Command OO 11 48 MOI meron SSS SS 11 43 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes OOO w 64 67 67 70 71 71 71 71 71 72 72 74 74 75 76 77 78 78 79 81 82 82 83 83 84 85 87 88 91 92 92 92 93 93 93 93 94 94 94 95 95 97 100 O Standerd A Option O Selection 12 1 2 4 4 600 Sets OA A808 12 1 2 4 7 50 50x Number of Part Systems Sets o po w me ee A Class Page 12 ProgramSupportFunctions 80 12 1 Machining Method SupportFunctions 0 12 1 1 Program E E S w i i MAA E E y O e i 12 1 2 2 Machine Tool Builder Macro A A804 12 1 23 Macro Interruption A A805 MARA E E TO PIPE ES 121 2 4 2 200 Ses A 12 1 2 4 3 300 Sets 12 1 2 4 8 100 100xNumber of Part Systems Sets 12 1 2 4 10 500 100xNumber of Part Systems Sets 121 2101NCode Macro So A 12 1 2 102 Macro Interface Extension 1200 Sets A A109 12 1 3 Fixed Cycle tt 12131 Fixed Cycle for Drilling ttt 12 1 3 3 Special Fixed Cyce At 12 1 3 4 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 120 1213 5 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining O88 12 4 4 Mirrorimage E E E 12 1 4 3MirrorimagebyG Code 8 12 144 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts A885 12 1 5 Coordinate System Operation 86 12151 Coordi
15. 1 5mA 120VAC I O module Type Building QY22 3mA 240VAC Block User s Manual Response time 1ms 0 5 cycle SH NA 080042 16 points common 18 point terminal block Surge killer provided c Transistor sink type 16 points 12 to 24VDC OFF time leakage current 0 1mA QY40P Response time 1ms 16 points common Sink type 18 point terminal block Thermal protection provided Short circuit protection provided Surge killer provided 32 points 12 to 24VDC OFF time leakage current 0 1mA QY41P Response time 1ms 32 points common Sink type 40 pin connector Thermal protection provided Short circuit protection provided I O module Type Building Surge killer provided Block User s Manual 64 points 12 to 24VDC SH NA 080042 OFF time leakage current 0 1mA QY42P Response time 1ms 32 points common Sink type 40 pin connector Thermal protection provided Short circuit protection provided Surge killer provided 16 points 12 to 24VDC OFF time leakage current 0 1mA QY50 Response time 1ms 16 points common Sink type 18 point terminal block Surge killer provided Fuse provided 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules d Transistor independent 8 points 5 to 24VDC OFF time leakage current 0 1mA I O module Type Building QY68A Response time 10ms Sink source type Block User s Manual 18 point terminal block Surge killer provided SH NA 080042 All points isolated e TTL CMOS 16 points 5 to 12VDC Response t
16. 1024 x 768 dots IB NA 0800434E TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1695M XTBD wide angle view 65536 colors lt Multi media and video RGB supported gt 24VDC built in flash memory 15MB b GT1685M 12 1 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1685M STBA wide angle view 65536 colors lt Multi media and video RGB supported gt 100 240VAC built in flash memory 15MB GT16 General Description 12 1 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots IB NA 0800434E TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1685M STBD wide angle view 65536 colors lt Multi media and video RGB supported gt 24VDC built in flash memory 15MB c GT1675M 10 4 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1675M STBA wide angle view 65536 colors lt Multi media and video RGB supported gt 100 240VAC built in flash memory 15MB GT16 General Description 10 4 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots IB NA 0800434E TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1675M STBD wide angle view 65536 colors lt Multi media and video RGB supportedd gt 24VDC built in flash memory 15MB 24 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules d GT1665M Modeiname Remas Reerene 8 4 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1665M STBA wide angle view 65536 colors lt Multi media and video RGB supported g
17. 12th axis index 13th axis index 14th axis index 15th axis index 16th axis index Spindle synchronization Basic spindle selection Spindle synchronization Synchronous spindle selection Spindle synchronization Phase shift amount PLC version code method 2 APLC output data 1 10 GOT window Data changeover request Part System Command 1st cutting feedrate override 2nd cutting feedrate override Rapid traverse override Manual feedrate 1st handle incremental feed magnification 2nd handle feed magnification 3rd handle feed magnification Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount 4 CNC Signals PLC Interface Signals Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis Window command travel amount Data registered to magazine for M OT ignored system Near point dog ignored Tool life management M system Tool group No designation Safety observing Synchronization control operation PLC constants method PLC bit selection Droop release invalid axis PLC axis indexing interface search amp start program No Special relay register signals Each axis reference position selection Workpiece coordinate offset measurement compensation No selected tool No External search device No External search program No External search sequence No External search block No User Macro input 1032 PLC gt Controller User Macro input 1033 PLC gt Controller User Macro input 1034 PLC gt Controller Use
18. 27 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 1 3 3 Peripheral Device 1 Signal splitter Modelname Remarks FCU7 HN387 Option Manual pulse generator is required for 2 or 3 axes specifications 2 Manual pulse generator Mode name Remarks O UFO 01 2Z9 5V specifications 12V specifications for connection to operation panel I O module HD60C l 12V power supply is separately required 3 I O extension connector unit Modelname Remarks FCU7 HN831 Point extension unit of external input output unit GT15 DIOR 1 3 4 Dual Signal Module 1 Dual signal module Modelname Remarks __ Q173SXY I O duplication monitoring module Maximum 3 modules Q173SXY 2 I O duplication monitoring module High speed type Maximum 3 modules 2 Terminal block Modelname___ _____________Remaks O O FA LTB40P Terminal block converter module Arrangement MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 3 Cable Modelname Remas i Cable for terminal block converter module FA CBLOOFMV M Cable lengthOO 05 0 5m 10 1m 20 2m 30 3m 50 5m Arrangement MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 28 2 General Specifications 2 1 Installation Environment Conditions 2 General Specifications For the specifications of GOT CNC servo spindle drive unit and I O module refer to the manuals written in System Configuration Component Modules 2 1 Installation Environment Conditions C70 whi
19. 45 3 Synchronous Tapping oo o o O 5o 45 3 1 Synchronous Tapping Cycle CAA A 8 45 3 2 Pecking Tapping Cycle A S a eo 45 3 102 Multiple spindle Synchronous Tapping __A A 45 4 Chamfering 8 4 5 8 High speed Synchronous Tapping OMR DD O A Ayy g CITE 8 46 1 Manual Rapid Traverse SOS ao po as 46 2JogFeed 8 46 3IncrementalFeed SAA Jo o y o o 46 4 Handle Feed CAS A ATA E E J Aayo 4 7 1 Dwell Time based Designation a o a 5 Program Memory Editing 2 UE 51 Memory Capacity SS y y o 5 1 1 Memory Capacity Number of Programs Stored ee ee eee 5 1 1 1 15kB 40m 64 programs O po e 5 1 1 2 30kB 80m 128 programs A an R 5 1 1 3 60kB 160m 200 programs A ee ee 5 1 1 4 125kB 320m 200 programs A an R 5 1 1 5 230kB 600m 400 programs A a R 5 1 1 6 500kB 1280m 1000 programs A a e 5 1 1 7 1000kB 2560m 1000 programs A a 5 1 1 8 2000kB 5120m 1000 programs A a oe 5 2 Editing E O giyo 5 2 1 Program Editing oo S O pp O y giyo 5 2 2BackgroundEditing SAP O JJ o Ao S 5 2 4 Word Editing AO Y Oo 4 O Standerd A Option O Selection C70 Series Class Page 6 Operation and Display 6 1 Structure of Operation Display Panel 6 1 2 Color Display GOT 6 3 8 3 German 6 3 8 6 Spanish 6 3 8 2 English ARE AAA 8 1 1 Spindle Control Functions IO l 8 1 1 1 Spindle Digital I F O o o 8 1 1 2 Spindle Analog I F A using MELSEC I O A usin
20. No of compensated axes 10 axes including number of axes for relative position error compensation 1 The compensation position is set for the compensation axis whose reference point serves as the zero 0 point Thus memory type pitch error compensation is not performed if return to reference point is not made for the compensation base axis or compensation execution axis after the controller power is turned ON and the servo is turned ON 2 When the compensation base axis Is a rotary axis select the dividing intervals so that one rotation can be divided Compensation amount Compensation base axis R 1 Division interval 3 As shown in the figure above highly individualized compensation control is exercised using the minimum output units with linear approximation for the compensation intervals between the compensation points Note 1 Compensation points 1 024 is a total including the points for memory type relative position error compensation Note 2 A scale of 0 to 99 fold is applied on the compensation amount Il 166 13 Machine Accuracy Compensation 13 1 Static Accuracy Compensation 13 1 3 Memory type Relative Position Error Compensation M system A L system A Machine accuracy can be improved by compensating the relative error between machine axes such as a production error or aging The compensation base axis and compensation execution axis are set by using parameters The compensation points
21. PIN PLC X16 2813 2A13 In J PLe x07 PEIN PLO X17 gt gt 2812 212 In Pic x08_ ZSA IN PLac xt8 2811 2A11 In price x09 ESEN PLo x1t9 apie 2A10 2A10 zoos m m 2A00 2A09 0 a a 2A08 pa we 2A07 2B05 2A05 2A06 2804 2A04 2405 2B03 2403 O de E 20 4 A AS 2802 2A02 A O A A 2801 2A01 jj J2svpmc icomm Pip fovicom2 pp 24VDCG COM1 _ EZX JOv COM2 DC24V 50 DC26 4V 40 DC28 8V 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 C 2B02 Temperature asen 2A02 Ben Note 1 Output pins with allow 0 2A output Other pins have 0 1A output Note 2 The device Nos written above are for the assignment on hardware These Nos are different from the device Nos to be actually used Cable side connector type onnector Pressure displacement type Crimp contact type Soldering type FCN 367J040 AU F FCN 363J040 FCN 361J040 AU Contact AWG 24 to 28 FCN 363J AU AWG 22 to 26 FCN 363J AU S FCN 360C040 B Case FCN 360C040 D Wide mouthed type FCN 360C040 E Long screw type FCN 360C040 H E Side mouthed type FCN 360C040 J1 Sloped mouth cover FCN 360C040 J2 Thin sloped mouth cover FUJITSU Component 52 2 General Specifications 2 8 Signal Splitter 2 8 Signal Splitter Note Signal splitter allows DIN rail installation only Dimension and Names of parts DIN Rail 86
22. ROOM 2512 2516 25 F GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE JINTIAN RD S FUTIAN DISTRICT SHENZHEN 518034 CHINA TEL 86 755 2399 8272 FAX 86 755 8218 4776 China Xiamen Service Dealer China Dongguan Service Dealer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO LTD KOREA FA CENTER Korea Service Center 8F Gangseo Hangang Xi tower 401 Yangcheon ro Gangseo gu Seoul 157 801 KOREA TEL 82 2 3660 9602 FAX 82 2 3664 8668 Korea Taegu Service Satellite 4F KT BUILDING 1630 SANGYEOK DONG BUK KU DAEGU 702 835 KOREA TEL 82 53 382 7400 FAX 82 53 382 7411 TAIWAN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO LTD TAIWAN FA CENTER Taiwan Taichung Service Center Central Area NO 8 1 INDUSTRIAL 16TH RD TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK SITUN DIST TAICHUNG CITY 40768 TAIWAN R O C TEL 886 4 2359 0688 FAX 886 4 2359 0689 Taiwan Taipei Service Center North Area 10F NO 88 SEC 6 CHUNG SHAN N RD SHI LIN DIST TAIPEI CITY 11155 TAIWAN R O C TEL 886 2 2833 5430 FAX 886 2 2833 5433 Taiwan Tainan Service Center South Area 11F 1 NO 30 ZHONGZHENG S ROAD YONGKANG DISTRICT TAINAN CITY 71067 TAIWAN R O C TEL 886 6 252 5030 FAX 886 6 252 5031 Notice Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual However please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric
23. Remas O Reterenos ACO5TB For AGTBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 positive common sink type modules 0 5m AC10TB For AGTBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 positive common sink type modules 1m AC20TB For AGTBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 positive common sink type modules 2m AC30TB For AGTBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 positive common sink type modules 3m AC50TB For AGTBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 positive common sink type modules 5m AC80TB For AGTBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 positive common sink type modules 8m Common current not exceeding 0 5A AC100TB For AGTBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 positive common sink type modules 10m I O module Type Building Common current not exceeding 0 5A Block User s Manual ACO5TB E For AGTBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBX54 E o S A6TBY54 E A6TBX70 E negative common source type modules 0 5m AC10TB E For AGTBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBX54 E A6TBY54 E A6TBX70 E negative common source type modules 1m AC20TB E For AGTBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBX54 E A6TBY54 E A6TBX70 E negative common source type modules 2m AC30TB E For AGTBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBX54 E A6TBY54 E A6TBX70 E negative common AC30TB E source type modules 3m AC50TB E For AGTBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBX54 E A6TBY54 E A6TBX70 E negative common source type modules 5m 18 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules c Cable for drive unit Motor side PLG cable CNP2E 1 oM Spindle side accuracy detector 30m 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 20 25 30 TS5690 cable For HF KP Servo
24. System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 23 Spring clamp terminal block Spring Clamp Terminal Block i mime to 16 Manual IB NA 0800204E 24 Terminal block adapter Insulation Displacement Q6TA32 For 32 points I O modules 0 5mm AWG20 nN re Series 32 Point I O Module Q6TA32 TOL Q6TA32 exclusive tool User s Manual IB NA 0800228E 25 Connector terminal block converter module Modetname Remas Reference AGTBX36 E For negative common type input modules standard type AGTBX54 E For negative common type input modules 2 wire type AGTBX7O For positive common type input modules 3 wire type For negative common type input modules O module Type Building AGTBX70 E Block User s Manual 3 wire type SH NA 080042 A6TBY36 E For source type output modules standard type A6TBY54 E For source type output modules 2 wire type AGTBXY36 For positive common type input modules and sink type output modules standard type AGTBXY54 For positive common type input modules and sink type output modules 2 wire type 16 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 26 Cable a Cables for CNC CPU FO20 Manual pulse generator 45m 0 5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 12V power supply type can be 1ch used F021 Manual pulse generator 0 5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 For Signal splitter 2ch F022 Manual pulse generator 0 5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 3ch G020 Manual pulse generator 15m 0 5 1 2 3 5 7 10
25. The installation must be that short circuits between cores of multicore cables cannot be possible or do not lead to hazardous situation Note 3 EMG Switches must employ 2 NC contacts and be of direct opening type IEC60947 5 1 Annex K IEC60947 5 5 57 2 General Specifications 2 11 I O Extension Connector Unit 2 11 I O Extension Connector Unit General specifications of I O Extension connector unit is same as that of GOT Refer to the instruction manual of GOT you are using As for input output specifications they are basically same as GT15 DIOR unit apart from the number of input points is extended to 64points Refer to the instruction manual for GT15 DIOR unit Note This unit is dedicated to GT15 DIOR sink iput source output It cannot be used for GT15 DIO source input sink output Specifications list em OoOo Specification Input connector MIL 40 pin connector x 2 CNX1 CNX2 Output connector MIL 26 pin connector x 1 CNY1 cable of Wie Batch solderless type AWG28 1 27 pitch flat cable PP Multicore cable solderless type AQG24 28 twisted cable Voltage 24VDC 20 4 28 8V Ripple ratio Less than 5 External connection method External power supply DCIN connector Supply from CNX1 or CNX3 connector is available Applicable size of electric wire AWG16 20 Connection cable between GT15 H810 cable and DIOR Install FCU7 HN831 unit in the same panel as GOT Input method Dynamic scan method sink input
26. tapia me constant Td Command deceleration check time Td Ts 0 1 7 ms 0 Acceleration deceleration inclination T Interpolation time 4 _ rapid L Interpolation distance 0 tan 7 2 When the interpolation distance is shorter than the acceleration and deceleration distance p Next block The time required to perform a command deceleration check during rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration deceleration is the longest value among the rapid traverse deceleration check times determined for each axis by the rapid traverse rate of commands executed simultaneously the rapid traverse acceleration deceleration time constant and the interpolation distance respectively rapid Rapid traverse rate Ts Acceleration deceleration time constant Td Command deceleration check time 0 Acceleration deceleration inclination T Interpolation time L Interpolation distance T 2xV TsxL rapid Td 3 4 0 1 7 ms id tan ius Ts Il 30 4 Feed 4 4 Acceleration Deceleration 3 2 axis simultaneous interpolation When linear interpolation is used Tsx lt Tsz and Lx Lz When 2 axis simultaneous interpolation linear interpolations is performed during rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration and deceleration the acceleration deceleration time is the longest value of the acceleration deceleration times determined for each axis by the rapid traverse rate of commands executed simultaneously t
27. 001 0 03 to 999 99 0 0001 0 255 to 9999 999 L system Metric command inchcommand Least input Thread number Least input Thread number increment command range increment command range inch thread inch 0 0001 0 0255 to 9999 9999 0 00001 0 25401 to 999 9999 mm thread inch inch thread inch 0 001 0 03 to 999 99 0 0001 0 0101 to 9999 9999 0 0001 0 255 to 9999 999 0 00001 0 10001 to 999 99999 The number of thread per inch is commanded for both metric and inch systems and the direction of the axis with a large movement serves as the reference Il 33 4 Feed 4 5 Thread Cutting 4 5 2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting M system L system O By commanding the lead increment decrement amount per thread rotation variable lead thread cutting can be performed The machining program is commanded in the following manner XU_ ZW FE K Variable lead thread cutting command Thread end point X coordinate Thread end point Z coordinate Thread s basic lead Lead increment decrement amount per thread rotation F 2 5K F 1 5K F 0 5K 4 v Lead speed F 3K F 2K F K F F 4K Il 34 4 Feed 4 5 Thread Cutting 4 5 3 Synchronous Tapping with digital I F spindle 4 5 3 1 Synchronous Tapping Cycle M system A L system A This function performs tapping through synchronized control of the spindle and servo axis This eliminates the need for floating taps and enables tapping to be conducted
28. 12 1 2 4 8 100 100 x Number of Part Systems Sets M system A L system A 12 1 2 4 9 200 100 x Number of Part Systems Sets M system A L system A 12 1 2 4 10 500 100 x Number of Part Systems Sets M system A L system A Il 108 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 2 101 N Code Macro M system A L system A This function calls the macro program using a pre registered N code The N No and the macro program are registered using parameter setting and up to eight can be registered Argument P N L G which cannot be used by a usual calling macro can be used In addition the argument G can be used up to four 1 Macro call by N code Format N lt Argument gt NA N code for performing macro call a The macro is called by N code The calling is same as G65 b The called N No is registered by the parameter setting Wild card can be used for N No registration Example for setting lt Code gt lt Program No gt N 01 12345 10000 NNo 12345 program No 10000 N 02 Ge 5000 TON No 5000 to 5999 for program No 5000 c N code call diverges to the macro as the arguments entire address data in same block and returns to the head of the next block d The macro subprogram can be called in up to four levels using N code macro call Main program 010000 G90G01F1000 G28X0Y0Z0 G92G53X0Y0Z0 M99 N12345 lt Argument gt N50
29. 15 5V power supply type can be 1ch used G021 Manual pulse generator 0 5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 For Signal splitter 2ch G022 Manual pulse generator Pn Of 120 071510 19 3ch G302 Display module hal a 2 3 5 10 15 20 For panel external wiring communication STP cross G303 Display module 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 For panel external wiring communication when using a HUB STP straight G380 Optical communication 5 10 12 15 20 For wiring between drive units cable outside panel For optical communication repeater unit G395 Optical communication 10m 125 905 15 10 For wiring between drive units cable outside panel For wiring between NC drive units cable inside panel ee ef connection H100 Emergencystop_ 30m 0 5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 ___________ H200 Display module 20m 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 For panel internal wiring communication UTP cross H300 SKIP manual pulse 20m 0 5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 generator input H310 SKIP connection 0 5 1 2 5 5 7 10 15 For Signal splitter 10 00 er ate o o Pa 1ch for 5V o fee per o communication H810 Connection cable between I O extension connector unit FCU7 HN831 and external Input output unit GT15 DIOR Note The Standard cable length column shows the lengths of the cable available from MITSUBISHI 17 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules b Cable for connector and terminal block changeover unit Modelmame
30. 20mA Output 04000 binary data Q173NCCPU a a a penaas MELSEG rowe Ue Q172DNCPU SP EE amy STATION pp 0 5 Ei q a rl nal a L 2 Je 4 pu SA ES FTE un i T a o eT S m E OUTILP2 1 MITSUBISHI E OETI Insulation degradation monitor screen QnUD H CP 32 50 ARE AE OPES 02 02 08 30 702 01 08 30 ES E sa e 51 Dwe t i f co D 0000 WM ONIM Leakage current transducer T 51LGF a model with built in low pass filter Spec Input AC Oto 30mA Output DC 4 to 20mA Zero phase sequence current transformer ZCT Il 184 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 Protection 15 3 1 Stroke End Over Travel M system O L system O Limit switches and dogs are attached to the machine and when a limit switch has kicked a dog the movement of the machine is stopped by the signal input from the limit switch At the same time the alarm output is sent to the machine The stroke end state is maintained and the alarm state is released by feeding the machine in the reverse direction in the manual mode to disengage the dog 15 3 2 Stored Stroke Limit This function sets the prohibited area for the tool to enter The stored stroke limits Il IIB IB and IC are handled as follows Prohibited e Set by the machine tool bu
31. Check The deceleration check function leads the machine to decelerate and stop at the join between one block and another before executing the next block to alleviate the machine shock and to prevent the corner roundness that occurs when the feedrate of the control axis changes suddenly Without deceleration check With deceleration check NO10 G01 X100 N010 G09 G01 X100 NO11 G01 Y 50 N011 G01 Y 50 A sharp edge is formed because the Corner rounding occurs because N011 block is started after the N010 the N011 block is started before remaining distance has reached the f the NO10 command is completely command deceleration check width finished or the in position check width The conditions for executing deceleration check are described below 1 Deceleration check in the rapid traverse mode In the rapid traverse mode the deceleration check is always performed when block movement is completed before executing the next block 2 Deceleration check in the cutting feed mode In the cutting feed mode the deceleration check is performed at the end of block when any of the conditions below is applicable before executing the next block a When G61 exact stop check mode is selected b When the G09 exact stop check is issued in the same block c when the error detect switch external signal is ON 3 Deceleration check system Deceleration check is a system that executes the next block only after the command deceleration
32. Dd1 Rri G83 G84 G85 Fixed cycle mode of drilling G83 G87 tapping G84 G88 or boring G85 G89 G87 G88 G89 The drilling command is modal Once it is given it is effective until another drill command is given or drilling fixed cycle cancel command is given Xx1 Cc Data for positioning X Z and C axes The data is unmodal To execute the same hole machining mode consecutively specify the data for each block Zz1 Rri Qqi1 Pp1 Ff Actual machining data in machining Only Q is unmodal Specify Q in G83 or G87 for each block whenever the data is required Kk1 To repeat in a single cycle for hole machining at equal intervals specify the number of repetitions in the range of 0 to 9999 no decimal point can be used It is unmodal and is effective only in the block in which the number of repetitions is specified If the number of repetitions is omitted K1 is assumed to be specified If KO is specified hole machining data is stored but hole machining is not performed Hole machining data R point position incremental value from initial point designation sign ignored If axis C clamp M command parameter setting is given the M code is output at the initial point and after return motion C axis unclamp M code clamp M code 1 is output and the dwell time set in a given parameter is executed Designates spindle rotation speed Designates spindle rotation speed at retract Designates tap spindle No for G84 G88 Change
33. E ae XD03 XDO00 PAB XD01 IES aa XSCNOT IMEI a soe sm a sm XSCNOO P89 XSCNO1 YDOE PB YDOF YDOC E 2 YDOD YDOA PB YDOB YDO08 P85 YDO9 YDO6 P84 YDO7 YD04 PBS YDO5 YD02 a oa YD03 _ E E e E 24VDC 24VDC 5 DCIN Connector 2 178313 5 Tyco Electronics Cable side 2 178288 3 ey Name of the oe Note 1 Xxx or Yxx in this chapter does not indicate the internal device No Note 2 Connect to common signal which is determined for each input signal since dynamic scan method is applied for the input method If the common is connected to 24DVC it does not operate normally X00 to XOF COMO is used as the common X10 to X1F COM1 is used as the common X20 to X2F COM2 is used as the common X30 to X3F COM is used as the common Note 3 It is recommended to use DCIN as a connecter for 24VDC input but it is available to supply from CNX1 or CNX2 In this case make sure to wire more than 2 pins Note 4 Pressure welding connector for multicore cable is also required for a cable side connecter which connects to CNX1 CNX2 or CNY1 connecter UFS ooB 04 YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS 61 3 Servo Spindle Drive System 3 Servo Spindle Drive System 1 Power supply regenerative type 200VAC 50Hz 200 to 230VAC 60Hz 380 to 440VAC 50Hz 380 to 480VAC 60Hz 1 0 15 10 MDS D V1 1 axis servo drive unit MDS DH V1 1 axis servo drive unit MDS D V2 2 axis servo drive unit MDS DH V2 2 axis servo drive unit MDS D
34. G02 XZ lil Kki Hypothetical corner intersection Chamfering end poin ae a Chamfering start point 2 b Corner chamfering II Circular linear Example G03 X Z lit Kk1 Cc1 G01 XZ Hypothetical corner intersection Example G02 X Z lit Kk1 Cc1 G02 XZ li2 Kk2 Hypothetical corner intersection Chamfering start point Il 139 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions d Corner R II Linear circular Example G01 X Z Rri G02 XZ l1 Kki Corner R start point Hypothetical corner intersection y Corner R end point e Corner R II Circular linear Example G03 X Z lil Kk1 Rr1 G01 XZ l Corner R end point Hypothetical corner intersection y Corner R start point f Corner R II Circular circular Example G02 X Z lil Kk1 Rr1 G02 XZ li2 Kk2 Hypothetical corner intersection Corner R start point Corner R Ari start point 2 Il 140 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 3 Specification of corner chamfering corner R speed E An E command can be used to specify the speed for corner chamfering or corner R This enables a corner to be cut to a correct shape Example G01XxX_Z Cc1 Ffl Eel XZ GO1 X_Z_ Rr1 Ff1 Ee XZ X ae An E command is a modal and remains effective for feeding in next corner chamfering or corner R An E command has two separate modals synchronous and
35. Machine movement valid range Prohibited area cu D _ O D 2 O A Prohibited area y setting setting Feed rate All axes will decelerate and stop if an alarm occurs even for a single axis during automatic operation Only the axis for which the alarm occurs will decelerate and stop during manual operation The stop position must be before the prohibited area The value of distance L between the stop position and prohibited area differs according to the feed rate and other factors Il 186 15 Safety and Maintenance 2 Stored Stroke Limit Il 15 3 Protection This is the stroke limit function which can be set by the user and the area outside the set limits is the prohibited area The maximum and minimum values for each axis can be set by parameters The function itself is used together with the stored stroke limit function described in the foregoing section and the tolerable area of both functions is the movement valid range The setting range is 99999 999 to 99999 999mm The stored stroke limit II function will be invalidated if the maximum and minimum parameter values are set to the same data Area prohibited by stored Machine movement stroke valid range limit function Il 0 D 2 O D O lt O A Point 4 setting Feed rate Prohibited area das setting The values of points 3 and 4 are set with the coordinate values in the
36. Pp1 results in a program error M system Il 157 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 2 Tool compensataion input The tool compensataion amounts which have been set from the setting and display unit can be input by program commands The command format differs between the M system and the L system The respective command format must be set by a parameter M system Tool length shape compensataion amount Tool length wear compensataion amount Tool radius shape compensataion amount Tool radius wear compensataion amount G10 L10 L11 L12 L13 Ppi Art L10 L11 L12 L13 Command for setting compensataion amount Compensataion No Compensataion amount Note 1 When L11 L12 L13 has been omitted the tool length shape compensataion amount is set Omitting Pp1 results in a program error L system G10 L10 L11 Pp1 Xx1Zz1 Rri Qq1 G10 L10 L11 Command for setting compensataion amount Compensataion No X axis compensataion amount Z axis compensataion amount Nose R compensation amount Hypothetical tool nose point Il 158 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 10 Machining Modal 12 1 10 1 Tapping Mode M system O L system O When tapping mode commands are issued the CNC system is set to the following internal control modes required for tapping 1 Cutting override is fixed at 100 2 Deceleration commands at joints
37. Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 2 2 Machine Tool Builder Macro M system A L system A This function enables macro programs exclusively designed for use by the machine builders to be registered in addition to the regular user macro programs As opposed to the conventional macro program the macro program display editing can be protected with a password This is suitable for maintaining the machine tool builder s original macro program confidentiality Machine tool builder macro programs are stored in a dedicated area which means that the user program registration area is not reduced in the process When registering a machine tool builder macro secure its space by formatting 64 KB of registration area is secured in the machine tool builder macro program and up to 100 programs can be registered there Macro program that is registered as a machine tool builder macro can be executed by defining it with the machine definition program and calling the defined G code This macro program can also be registered in G code macro or M code macro The macro program is described in the same manner as a conventional machining program User subprograms or machine tool builder macros can also be called from the machine tool builder macros Up to 4 nesting levels are available G65 G66 and G66 1 commands do not call the machine tool builder macro programs Variables for the machine tool builder macros can be use
38. SUPERHIGHWAY ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA PHILIPPINES 1771 TEL 63 2 807 2416 FAX 63 2 807 2417 VIETNAM MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO LTD Vietnam Ho Chi Minh Service Center UNIT 01 04 10TH FLOOR VINCOM CENTER 72 LE THANH TON STREET DISTRICT 1 HO CHI MINH CITY VIETNAM TEL 84 8 3910 5945 FAX 84 8 3910 5946 Vietnam Hanoi Service Satellite 6th Floor Detech Tower 8 Ton That Thuyet Street My Dinh 2 Ward Nam Tu Liem District Hanoi Vietnam TEL 84 4 3937 8075 FAX 84 4 3937 8076 PT MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA Indonesia Service Center Cikarang Office JL Kenari Raya Blok G2 07A Delta Silicon 5 Lippo Cikarang Bekasi 17550 INDONESIA TEL 62 21 2961 7797 FAX 62 21 2961 7794 THAILAND MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION THAILAND CO LTD Thailand Service Center 12TH FLOOR SV CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1 NO 896 19 AND 20 RAMA 3 ROAD KWAENG BANGPONGPANG KHET YANNAWA BANGKOK 10120 THAILAND TEL 66 2 682 6522 31 FAX 66 2 682 6020 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT LTD India Service Center 2nd FLOOR TOWER A amp B DLF CYBER GREENS DLF CYBER CITY DLF PHASE II GURGAON 122 002 HARYANA INDIA TEL 91 124 4630 300 FAX 91 124 4630 399 Ludhiana satellite office Jamshedpur satellite office India Pune Service Center EMERALD HOUSE EL 3 J BLOCK MIDC BHOSARI PUNE 411 026 MAHARASHTRA INDIA TEL 91 20 2710 2000 FAX 91 20 2710 2100 Baroda satellite office Mumbai sate
39. Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 9 Door Interlock 15 3 9 1 Door Interlock M system O L system O Outline of function Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards machine directive the opening of any protective doors while a machine is actually moving is prohibited When the door open signal is input from the PLC this function first decelerates stops all the control axes establishes the ready OFF status and then shuts off the drive power inside the servo drive units so that the motors are no longer driven When the door open signal has been input during automatic operation the suspended machining can be resumed by first closing the door concerned and then initiating cycle start again Description of operation When a door is open The NC system operates as follows when the door open signal is input 1 It stops operations 1 When automatic operation was underway The machine is set to the feed hold mode and all the axes decelerate and stop The spindle also stops 2 When manual operation was underway All the axes decelerate and stop immediately The spindle also stops 2 The complete standby status is established 3 After all the servo axes and the spindle have stopped the ready OFF status is established 4 The door open enable signal is output Release the door lock using this signals at the PLC When a door is closed After the PLC has confirmed that the door has been closed and locked
40. W Pi Qk Rd Ff Retract amount e when X U Z W command is not given Modal B point coordinate absolute incremental B point coordinate absolute incremental Tool shift amount radius designation incremental sign not required Cut depth k radius designation incremental sign not required Relief amount at cut bottom d If sign is not provided relief is made at the first cut bottom If minus sign is provided relief is made not at the first cut bottom but at the second cut bottom and later Feed rate S start point e 9 and 12 just before the last cycle are executed with the remaining distance e 2 4 6 8 10 11 and 12 are executed at the rapid traverse feed rate Il 130 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 6 Longitudinal cutting off cycle G75 When the slotting end point coordinates cut depth cutting tool shift amount and cutting tool relief amount at the cut bottom are commanded automatic slotting is performed in the longitudinal direction of a given bar by G75 fixed cycle The machining program is commanded as follows Re X U Z W Pi Qk Rd Ff Retract amount e when X U Z W command is not given Modal B point coordinate absolute incremental B point coordinate absolute incremental Tool shift amount radius designation incremental sign not required Cut depth k radius designation incremental sign not req
41. and all the workpiece coordinate systems can be simultaneously shifted by an amount equivalent to the offset When the external workpiece coordinate offset is zero the external workpiece coordinate systems coincide with the machine coordinate system lt is not possible to assign movement commands by selecting the external workpiece coordinates Workpiece coordinate 4 Workpiece coordinate 5 Workpiece coordinate 6 G57 Workpiece coordinate 1 Workpiece coordinate 2 Workpiece coordinate 3 G54 Machine coordinate system External workpiece coordinate Machine coordinate zero point i Workpiece coordinate 4 Workpiece coordinate 5 Workpiece coordinate 6 G57 G58 G59 Workpiece coordinate 1 Workpiece coordinate 2 Workpiece coordinate 3 G54 G55 G56 External workpiece coordinate External workpiece coordinate offset AS Machine coordinate system IY Machine coordinate zero point Il 80 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 7 Local Coordinate System M system O L system O This function is for assigning a coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system currently being selected This enables the workpiece coordinate system to be changed temporarily The local coordinate system can be selected independently on each workpiece coordinate system G54 to G59 G54 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 G52 Local coordinate syst
42. arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 4 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 8 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 16 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 1 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 2 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 4 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 8 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 16 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis valid Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 1 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 2 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 4 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 8 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 16 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off Manual arbitrary feed axis independent Manual arbitrary feed EX F MODAL F Manual arbitrary feed GO G1 Manual arbitrary feed MC WK Manual arbitrary feed ABS INC Manual arbitrary feed stop Manual arbitrary feed strobe 2nd reference position return interlock Search amp start Inclined axis control no z axis compensation Hypothetical axis command mode Chopping Chopping parameter valid Compensation method selection Operation mode selection Rapid traverse override valid 1st spindle multiple spindle synchronous tapping valid 2nd spindle multiple spindle synchronous tapping valid 3rd spindle multiple spindle synchronous tapping valid 4th sp
43. are displayed on the Operation history screen The most recent history data appears at the top of the screen and the older data is displayed in sequence below 2 Outputting the data in the operation history memory Information on the alarms occurring during NC operation and stop codes signal information on the changes in the PLC interface input signals and the key histories can be output 15 4 2 Data Sampling M system O L system O The data sampling function can sample the CNC internal data speed output from the CNC to the drive unit and feedback data from the drive unit etc and output it as text data 15 4 3 NC Data Backup M system O L system O This function serves to back up the parameters and other data of the CNC control unit The data can also be restored Il 196 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 4 5 Servo Tuning Support Tools 15 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting The servo parameters can be automatically adjusted by connecting the CNC and a servo tuning support tool which is an application designed to be used on a regular personal computer The servo tuning support tool measures and analyzes the machine characteristics to automatically adjust the servo parameters while having the motor run by test NC programs or vibration signals The currently available servo tuning support tool is MS Configurator The servo adjustment process flow is shown below Start servo adjustment Set environment Display ad
44. are divided at any desired equal intervals 1 Compensation point dividing intervals 1 to 9999999 um 2 Number of compensation points 1024 3 Compensation amount 128 to 127 output unit 4 No of compensated axe 10 axes including number of axes for memory type pitch error compensation 1 The compensation position is set for the compensation axis whose reference point serves as the zero 0 point Thus memory type relative position error compensation is not performed if return to reference point is not made for the compensation base axis or compensation execution axis after the controller power is turned ON and the servo is turned ON 2 When the compensation base axis is a rotary axis select the dividing intervals so that one rotation can be divided 3 Since all coordinate systems of compensation execution axes are shifted or displaced by the compensation amount when the relative position error compensation is made the stroke check point and machine coordinate system are also shifted or displaced Note 1 Compensation points 1024 is a total including the points for memory type pitch error compensation Note 2 A scale of 0 to 99 fold is applied on the compensation amount 13 1 4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation M system A L system A The coordinate system can be shifted by inputting a compensation amount from the PLC This compensation amount will not appear on the counters all counters including m
45. are run 1 3 3 MDI Mode M system O L system O The MDI data stored in the memory of the CNC unit is executed Once executed the MDI data is set to the setting incomplete status and the data will not be executed unless the setting completed status is established by performing screen operations 1 3 102 High speed program server mode M system A L system A This function allows a high speed transfer and operation of machining programs to the large capacity buffer memory in a CNC CPU using the Ethernet FTP function And the operation requires an FTP server such as PC or an Ethernet connection with GTO with FTP server function connected with a memory card or a USB memory Il 2 2 Input Command 2 1 Data Increment 2 Input Command 2 1 Data Increment 2 1 1 Least command increment 2 1 1 1 Least command increment 1 um M system O L system O It is possible to command 0 001 mm for the linear axis and 0 001 for the rotation axis 2 1 1 2 Least command increment 0 1 um M system A L system A It is possible to command 0 0001 mm for the linear axis and 0 0001 for the rotation axis The data increment handled in the controller include the least input increment least command increment and least detection increment Each type is set with parameters 1 The least input increment indicates the increment handled in the internal processing of the controller The counter and tool offset data etc input from the scree
46. asynchronous feed rate modals The effective feed rate is determined by synchronous G95 or asynchronous G94 mode If an E command is specified in O or no E command has been specified the feed rate specified by an F command is assumed as the feed rate for corner chamfering or corner R Hold or non hold can be selected M system only using a parameter for the E command modal at the time of resetting It is cleared when the power is turned OFF as it is with an F command Il 141 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 6 3 Geometric Command M system L system O When it is difficult to find the intersection point of two straight lines with a continuous linear interpolation command this point can be calculated automatically by programming the command for the angle of the straight lines Example Ni GO1 Aali Ffi a Angle formed between straight line and N2 Xx1 Zz1 Aa2 horizontal axis on plane The plane is the selected plane at this point End point X1 Z1 Automatic intersection N point calculation Start point Note 1 This function cannot be used when using the A axis or 2nd miscellaneous function A Il 142 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 1 Automatic calculation of two arc contact When two continuous circular arcs contact with each other and it is difficult to find the contact the contact is automatically calcula
47. at a highly precise tap depth 1 Tapping pitch assignment G84 G74 Xx1 Yy1 2Zz1Rri Ppt Ffi Ssi R1 G84 Synchronous tapping mode ON forward tapping Synchronous tapping mode ON reverse tapping Hole position data hole drilling coordinate position Hole machining data hole bottom position Hole machining data hole R position Hole machining data dwell time at hole bottom Z axis feed amount tapping pitch per spindle rotation Spindle speed Synchronous system selection 2 Tapping thread number assignment G84 G74 Xx1 Yy1 ZziRri Pp1 Eel Ssi R1 G84 Synchronous tapping mode ON forward tapping Synchronous tapping mode ON reverse tapping Hole position data hole drilling coordinate position Hole machining data hole bottom position Hole machining data hole R position Hole machining data dwell time at hole bottom Tap thread number per 1 inch feed of Z axis Spindle speed Synchronous system selection The control state will be as described below when a tapping mode command G74 G84 is commanded Cutting override Fixed to 100 Feed hold invalid In tapping mode signal is output Deceleration command between blocks invalid Single block invalid The tapping mode will be canceled with the following G commands Cio A Exact stop check mode G61 1 High accuracy control mode EA Automatic corner override El A Cutting mode Il 35 4 Feed 4 5 T
48. because of a programming error When a move command exceeding the area set in a given parameter is programmed the tool is stopped at the barrier boundaries Program format Barrier ON Barrier OFF cancel 1 When the machine is about to exceed the area the machine is stopped and an alarm is displayed To cancel the alarm execute reset 2 The function is also effective when the machine is locked 3 This function is valid when all axes for which a barrier has been set have completed reference point return 4 The chuck barrier tail stock barrier can be set independently for part system 1 and part system 2 5 Chuck barrier tail stock barrier setting The chuck barrier and tail stock barrier are both set with the machine coordinate by inputting one set of three point data in the parameter Points P1 P2 and P3 are the chuck barrier and points P4 P5 and P6 are the tail stock barrier The X axis is set with the coordinate value radius value from the workpiece center and the Z axis is set with the basic machine coordinate system coordinate Point PO is the chuck barrier and tail stock barrier s basic X coordinates and the workpiece center coordinate in the basic machine coordinate system Is set The barrier area is assumed to be symmetrical for the Z axis and if the X axis coordinate of barrier point P_ is minus the sign is inverted to plus and the coordinate is converted for a check Set the absolute values of the X axis
49. between blocks are invalid 3 Feed hold is invalid 4 Single block is invalid 5 In tapping mode signal is output Geode Function _ G63 Tapping mode ON The tapping mode command will be canceled with the following commands Exact stop check mode G61 Automatic corner override G62 Cutting mode G64 High accuracy control mode command G61 1 M system The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned on 12 1 10 2 Cutting Mode M system O L system O When a cutting mode command is issued the NC system is set to the cutting mode that enables smooth cutting surface to be achieved In this mode the next block is executed continuously without the machine having to decelerate and stop between the cutting feed blocks this is the opposite of what happens in the exact stop check mode G61 Gcode Function G64 Cutting mode ON The cutting mode command will be canceled with the following commands Exact stop check mode G61 Automatic corner override G62 Tapping mode G63 High accuracy control mode command G61 1 M system The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned on Il 159 12 Program Support Functions 12 2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions 12 2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions 12 2 1 Automatic Corner Override M system O L system O To prevent machining surface distortion due to the increase in the cutting load when
50. cancel command is given The fixed cycle can be canceled by using any of the following G codes G00 G01 G02 G03 G09 G10 G11 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G33 G34 G37 G92 G52 G53 G65 Il 120 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 1 Longitudinal cutting cycle G77 a Longitudinal cutting Straight cutting in the longitudinal direction can be performed consecutively by the following block G77 X U_ Z W_F_ U R Rapid traverse feed F Cutting feed b Taper cutting Taper cutting in the longitudinal direction can be performed consecutively by the following block G77 X U_Z W_R_F_ X axis R Rapid traverse feed 2 F Cutting feed r Taper part depth radius designation incremental value sign is required Il 121 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 2 Thread cutting cycle G78 a Straight thread cutting Straight thread cutting can be performed by the following block G78 X U_Z W_F E X axis R Rapid traverse feed F For E code designation NIE b Taper thread cutting Taper thread cutting can be performed by the following block G78 X U_ Z W_R_F E_ X axis R Rapid traverse feed F F or E code designation r Taper part depth radius designation incremental value sign is required Il 122 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions Chamf
51. check is executed as shown below and it has been confirmed that the position error amount including the servo system is less than the in position check width designated with parameter or with I in same block Next block block a In position check width completion point Il 161 12 Program Support Functions 12 2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions 12 2 2 1 Exact Stop Check Mode M system O L system O A deceleration check is performed when the G61 exact stop check mode command has been selected G61 is a modal command The modal command is released by the following commands G62 Automatic corner override G63 Tapping mode G64 Cutting mode G61 1High accuracy control mode M system Refer to 12 2 2 Deceleration Check for details on the deceleration check 12 2 2 2 Exact Stop Check M system O L system O A deceleration check is performed when the G09 exact stop check command has been designated in the same block The G09 command is issued in the same block as the cutting command Itis an unmodal command Refer to 12 2 2 Deceleration Check for details on the deceleration check 12 2 2 3 Error Detection M system O L system O To prevent rounding of a corner during cutting feed the operation can be changed by turning an external signal switch ON so that the axis decelerates and stops once at the end of the block and then the next block is executed The deceleration stop at the end
52. counterclockwise direction a negative number provides positioning in the clockwise direction Example With 0 001mm least input increment NOO1 G91 N002 G81 Z 10 000 R5 000 LO F200 NO0O03 G90 G34 X200 000 Y100 000 1100 000 J20 000 K6 NO04 G80 os G81 cancel NO05 G90 Go X500 000 Y100 000 X1 200 mm n 6 holes Y1 100 mm Position prior to excution 500 mm 100 mm GO command in of G34 command N005 As shown in the figure the tool is positioned above the final hole upon completion of the G34 command This means that when it is to be moved to the next position it will be necessary to calculate the coordinates in order to issue the command or commands with incremental values and so it is convenient to use the absolute value mode Il 116 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 2 Line at angle G35 With the starting point at the position designated by X and Y the tool drills n number of holes each at interval d in the direction forming angle 6 with the X axis A standard fixed cycle applies for the drilling operation at each of the hole positions and so there is a need to retain beforehand the drilling data drilling mode and drilling data All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the GOO mode The data is not retained upon completion of the G35 command G35 Xx Yy ld J Kn Xx Yy The starting point coordinates they are affected by the G90 G91 c
53. cutting corners this function automatically applies an override on the cutting feed rate so that the cutting amount is not increased for a set time at the corner Automatic corner override is valid only during tool radius compensation The automatic corner override mode is set to ON by the G62 command and it is canceled by any of the G commands below G40 Tool radius compensation cancel G61 Exact stop check mode G63 Tapping mode G64 Cutting mode G61 1 High accuracy control mode M system Programmed path 6 Machining allowance finished shape workpiece f S aas Workpiece surface VA Tn N _ Lob eS Tool center path i Machinihg es Ci EN Deceleration IN range i j 109 A Max angle at inside corner gt eS Ci Deceleration range IN Operation a When automatic corner override is not to be applied When the tool moves in the order of 1 2 gt 3 in the figure above the machining allowance at 3 is larger than that at 2 by an amount equivalent to the area of shaded section S and so the tool load increases b When automatic corner override is to be applied When the inside corner angle 6 in the figure above is less than the angle set in the parameter the override set into the parameter is automatically applied in the deceleration range Ci Il 160 12 Program Support Functions 12 2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions 12 2 2 Deceleration
54. cycle Multiple repetitive thread cutting 1 Longitudinal rough cutting cycle G71 The finish shape program is called and straight rough cutting is performed while intermediate path is being calculated automatically The machining program is commanded as follows Ud Re Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww FfSsTt Cut depth d When P Q command is not given Modal Retract amount e Modal Finish shape program No If it is omitted the program being executed is assumed to be designated Finish shape start sequence No If it is omitted the program top is assumed to be designated Finish shape end sequence No If it is omitted the program end is assumed to be designated However if M99 precedes the Q command up to M99 Finishing allowance in the X axis direction When P Q command is given Diameter or radius designation Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction Cutting feed rate F S and T command in the finish shape program are Spindle speed ignored and the value in the rough cutting command Tool command or the preceding value becomes effective Il 125 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions Cycle commanded point d Cut depth Details of retract operation Il 126 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 2 Face rough cutting cycle G72 The finish shape program is called and rough turning is performed in the end face di
55. dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product Duplication Prohibited This manual may not be reproduced in any form in part or in whole without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation O 2006 2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED MITSUBISHI CNC MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BLDG 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN 100 009 Manual No IB 1500259 IB NA 1500259 ENG H 1409 MEE a l l Made in JAPAN Specifications are subject to change without notice
56. drive units spindle motors and servo motors Refer to C70 Series Specifications List II in the contents Refer to the following manuals for details on the servo and spindle system DRIVE SYSTEM DATA BOOK IB 1500273 MDS D DH Series Specifications Manual IB 1500875 MDS D SVJ3 SPJ3 Series Specifications Manual IB 1500158 MDS DM Series Specifications Manual IB 1500891 DRIVE SYSTEM DATA BOOK IB 1501142 MDS D2 DH2 Series Specifications Manual IB 1501124 MDS DJ Series Specifications Manual IB 1501130 MDS DM2 Series Specifications Manual IB 1501136 Il 201 17 Machine Support Functions 17 1 PLC 17 Machine Support Functions 17 1 PLC 17 1 2 PLC Functions 17 1 2 1 Built in PLC Basic Function M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC As the PLC function of MITSUBISHI CNC C70 the PLC CPU of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC is used Select a PLC suitable for the control scale and the performance from several kinds of PLCs and use it Refer to the material of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC which can be used with MITSUBISHI CNC C7O for details II 202 17 Machine Support Functions 17 1 PLC 17 1 2 2 NC Exclusive Instruction M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC NC exclusive instructions are not MELSEC standard instructions They are directly related to the memory in the CNC and convenient for using a CNC They can be programmed with the MELSEC programming tool GX Developer as other stan
57. each axis and so that the shortest time is taken Linear type Parameter setting enables movement at the rapid traverse rates of the respective axes independently for each axis In this case the tool path does not take the form of a straight line to the end point Non Linear type Example Linear type Moves lineary Example Non linear type Each axis moves at to the end point each parameter speed G00 G91 X100 Y100 G00 G91 X100 Y100 Y End point Y End point 100 100 O Current position 100 Current position 100 Note 1 If the acceleration deceleration conditions differ between the axes the path will not be linear to the end point even when using the linear type 4 The tool is always accelerated at the start of the program command block and decelerated at the end of the block Il 10 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 1 Positioning 3 1 2 Unidirectional Positioning M system A L system The G60 command always moves the tool to the final position in the direction determined by parameters The tool can be positioned without backlash G60 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Also possible for additional axes A B C U V W simultaneously x1 y1 z1 numerical values denoting the position data With the above command the tool is first moved to a position distanced from the end point position by an amount equivalent to the creep distance parameter setting and then moved to its final position For details on the rapid trave
58. enables one control axis to be dynamically switched to be used as NC axis or PLC axis If the PLC axis is set as indexing axis changeover is available between the NC axis and the indexing axis II 220 17 Machine Support Functions 17 4 PLC Interface 17 4 PLC Interface 17 4 1 CNC Control Signal M system O L system O Control commands to the CNC system are assigned from the PLC Input signals with skip inputs that respond at high speed can also be used 1 Control signals Control signals for operations in automatic operation mode Control signals for operations in manual operation mode Control signals for program execution Control signals for interrupt operations Control signals for servo Control signals for spindle Control signals for mode selection Control signals for axis selection Control signals for feed rates Skip signals When signals are input to the skip input interface they are processed by interrupt processing This enables functions requiring a high response speed to be implemented Maximum 4 points For further details refer to the PLC Interface Manual II 221 17 Machine Support Functions 17 4 PLC Interface 17 4 2 CNC Status Signal M system O L system O The status signals are output from the CNC system They can be utilized by referencing them from the PLC Status output functions 1 Controller operation ready When the controller power is turned ON and the controller
59. function finish signal 2 FIN2 When the controller checks that FIN2 is ON it sets the function strobes OFF and simultaneously advances to the next block The PLC checks that the strobe signals are OFF and sets FIN2 OFF Below is an example of a time chart applying when a miscellaneous function has been assigned X Next block Command Miscellaneous function strobe MF Miscellaneous function finish signal FIN2 Il 62 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 4 2nd Miscellaneous Function B 3 4 2nd Miscellaneous Functions B 8 4 1 2nd Miscellaneous Functions M system O L system O The code data and start signals are output when an 8 digit number is assigned following the address code A B or C whichever does not duplicate the axis name being used Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all 2nd miscellaneous commands Note 1 There are some screens in the setting and display unit that cannot display all eight digits Il 63 9 Tool Compensation 9 1 Tool Length Tool Position 9 Tool Compensation 9 1 Tool Length Tool Position 9 1 1 Tool Length Compensation M system O L system O These commands make it possible to control the axis movement by offsetting the position of the end point of the movement command by the amount set on the TOOL OFFSET screen Using this function it is possible to offset the difference in distance between the actual position of the m
60. her machine or equipment and export it to any country other than where he she bought it the customer may sign a paid warranty contract with our local FA center This falls under the case where the product purchased from us in or outside Japan is exported and installed in any country other than where it was purchased For details please contact the distributor from which the customer purchased the product 3 Exclusion of Responsibility for Compensation against Loss of Opportunity Secondary Loss etc Whether during or after the term of warranty we assume no responsibility for any damages arising from causes for which we are not responsible any losses of opportunity and or profit incurred by the customer due to a failure of this product any damages secondary damages or compensation for accidents arising under specific circumstances that either foreseen or unforeseen by Mitsubishi Electric any damages to products other than this product or compensation for any replacement work readjustment and startup test run of on site machines or any other operations conducted by the customer 4 Changes in Product Specifications Specifications shown in our catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without notice 5 Product Application 1 For the use of this product its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or malfunction occurs in the product and a backup or fail safe function s
61. is to stop The measurement rate When R_ D_ and F_ have been omitted the values set in the parameters are used Tool change point At this time the tool length offset amount has a minus value O A elite thet AAE Reference position In case of machine coordinate system zero point Example of program G28 Z0 T01 MO6 T02 G43 GOO ZO H01 G37 Z 300 R10 D2 F10 Amount of movement based on tool length measurement In this case the distance H01 Za1 z0 from the tool TO1 tip to the top of the measurement sensor is calculated as the tool length offset amount which is then registered in the tool offset table Tool length measurement position Za1 A rr rro horror morro rro ro raro ro Sensor Note 1 The measurement position arrival signal sensor signal is also used as the skip signal Il 174 14 Automation Support Functions 14 1 Measurement Area A Moves with rapid traverse feed Start point rate Areas B1 B2 Moves with the measurement speed f or parameter setting If a sensor signal is input in area B4 an error will occur If a sensor signal is not input in the area Bo Measurement an error will occur position Z Il 175 14 Automation Support Functions 14 1 Measurement 2 Automatic tool length measurement L system This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by the commanded value between t
62. made more efficiently 3 The machining program will not be searched as the operation target even when searched in the edit screen 5 2 4 Word Editing M system O L system O This function enables to edit programs in word unit by insertion deletion and replacement Il 44 6 Operation and Display 6 Operation and Display 6 1 Structure of Operation Display Panel 6 1 2 Color Display GOT M system L L system LJ Refer to the l 1 3 2 GOT Il 45 6 1 Structure of Operation Display Panel 6 Operation and Display 6 2 Operation Methods and Functions 6 2 Operation Methods and Functions 6 2 2 Absolute Value Incremental Value Setting M system O L system O When setting the data the absolute incremental setting can be selected from the menu The absolute incremental settings can be selected on the following screens e Tool compensation amount screen e Coordinate system offset screen 6 2 3 Single NC and Multi display Unit Switch M system O L system O By adding an Ethernet hub up to eight displays can be changed over for one CNC Note that the max number of displays that can be connected Is limited by the machine operation panel specifications 6 2 4 Multi NC and Common display Unit M system O L system O By adding an Ethernet hub up to 64 CNC modules can be changed over and displayed on one display Note that the max number of modules that can be connected is limited by the machine operation panel
63. not returning to the grid point Same method as the dog type of incremental detection method Diagnosis during absolute position detection 1 2 3 4 warning signal will be output Il 89 The zero point is established when a torque limit is applied on the servo and the torque limit is reached by pressing against the machine stopper The zero point is established when a torque limit is applied on the servo and execute an automatic pressing twice The zero point is established by input in the absolute position setting screen The zero point is established with dog type reference point return completion An alarm will be output if the absolute position information is lost An alarm will be output if the voltage of the battery for backing up the absolute position data drops The value equivalent to the shift amount is set in the absolute position setting screen The value equivalent to the shift amount is set in the absolute position setting screen The value is set in the parameter of zero point shift amount The machine position at power OFF and ON can be confirmed on the absolute position monitor screen If the amount that the axis is moved during power OFF exceeds the tolerable value parameter a 11 Operation Support Functions 11 1 Program Control 11 Operation Support Functions 11 1 Program Control 11 1 1 Optional Block Skip L system O M system O When slash c
64. of 1 2 input voltage the operator may receive an electric shock when touching metal parts Note 3 When Q61P Q63P Q64PN or Q64P is loaded on the extension base unit a system error cannot be detected by the ERR terminal ERR terminal is always OFF Note 4 Q64P automatically switches the input range 100 200VAC Therefore it is not compatible with the intermediate voltage 133 to 169VAC The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is applied Also note that Q64P may break down when connected to the power supply whose voltage or frequency is out of the specifications 35 2 General Specifications 2 4 PLC CPU 2 4 PLC CPU For the further details than the following descriptions refer to QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection SH NA 080483ENG Dimension and Names of parts QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QOUDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU 36 2 General Specifications 2 4 PLC CPU 98 115 QO3UDVCPU QO4UDVCPU QO6UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU 1 CARD Memory card slot for C70 2 SW RUN STOP and RESET switche
65. of the cutting feed block can also be commanded with a G code Refer to 12 2 2 Deceleration Check for details on the deceleration check Il 162 12 Program Support Functions 12 2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions 12 2 2 4 Programmable In position Check M system O L system O This command is used to designate the in position width which is valid when a linear interpolation command is assigned from the machining program The in position width designated with a linear interpolation command is valid only in cases when the deceleration check is performed such as e When the error detect switch is ON e When the GO9 exact stop check command has been designated in the same block e When the G61 exact stop check mode command has been selected Linear interpolation coordinates of axes Feed rate In position width This command is used to designate the in position width which is valid when a positioning command is assigned from the machining program Positioning coordinates of axes In position width In position check operation After it has been verified that the position error between the block in which the positioning command G00 rapid traverse is designated and the block in which the deceleration check is performed by the linear interpolation command G01 is less than the in position width of this command the execution of the next block is commenced Il 163 12 Program Support Functions
66. point P and Q Absolute center coordinates of circular arc H 0 Intersection with shoter line H 1 Intersection with longer line 4 Automatic calculation of linear arc contact When it is difficult to find the contact of a given line and circular arc the contact is automatically calculated by programming the following blocks Example G01 Aai Ffi G03 Xxc Zzc Rri Ff2 Il 144 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 5 Automatic calculation of arc linear contact When it is difficult to find the contact of a given circular arc and line the contact is automatically calculated by programming the following blocks Example G02 Rri Ffi G01 Xxc Zzc Aai Ff2 Il 145 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 7 Axis Control 12 1 7 1 Chopping 12 1 7 1 1 Chopping M system A L system A With this function the chopping axis constantly moves back and forth independently of the program operation during executing the machining program During the grinding operation chopping can produce a better surface accuracy than using abrasive grain _ Q_ F_ Starting the chopping operation The upper dead point Select the chopping axis with commanded axis address Command the distance between the upper dead point and the lower dead point with incremental value Command the feedrate during chopping mm min G80 Cancelling the chopping o
67. positioning II 219 17 Machine Support Functions 17 3 PLC Operation Operation functions Automatic mode Stations will be determined automatically Manual mode Stations will be determined manually While the start signal is ON the axis will be rotated at a constant speed When the start signal is OFF the axis will be positioned at the nearest station JOG mode The axis will be rotated at constant speed Incremental feed The axis will be moved by the designed amount Manual handle feed The axis will be moved by the manual pulse generator Reference position return The axis will be positioned at the reference position Reference position return is not possible by a dog switch Feed functions Feed rate selection Automatic mode and manual mode can have each four different feed rates to be designated in the PLC program Acceleration deceleration method Four different combination can be set from the acceleration deceleration patterns linear or S pattern acceleration deceleration and the acceleration deceleration time constants The combination will be selected in the PLC program Select acceleration deceleration type with parameter the acceleration deceleration with constant time or the one with a constant angle of inclination e Short cut control A least movement distance is automatically judged when a rotary axis is rotated 17 3 101 NC Axis PLC Axis Changeover M system A L system A This function
68. state the movement amount will be compensated in the next servo ON state by one of the following two methods You can select the compensation method using a parameter 1 The counter is corrected according to the movement amount follow up function 2 The motor is moved according to the counter and compensated When follow up function is designated the movement amount will be compensated even in the emergency stop state The axis is simultaneously set to servo OFF state and the interlock state Mechanical handle Even if the servo OFF axis is moved with the mechanical handle with the application of the servo OFF function and follow up function the position data can be constantly read in and the machine position updated Thus even if the axis is moved with the mechanical handle the coordinate position display will not deviate II 206 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction 17 2 2 Axis Detachment M system A L system A This function enables the control axis to be released from control Conversely an axis which has been freed from control can be returned to the control status This function enables the rotary table or attachments to be removed and replaced Automatic operation is disabled until the axis for which the axis detach command has been released completes its dog type reference position return This shows the configuration of a machine for which switching between the C axis and turning tabl
69. the NC system operates as follows when the door open signal is set to OFF 5 All the axes are set to ready ON 6 The door open enable signal is set to OFF Resuming operation 7 When automatic operation was underway Press the AUTO START button Operation now resumes from the block in which machining was suspended when the door open signal was input 8 When manual operation was underway Axis movement is commenced when the axis movement signals are input again 9 Spindle rotation Restore the spindle rotation by inputting the forward rotation or reverse rotation signal again Il 192 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 9 2 Door Interlock Il M system O L system O Outline of function Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards machine directive the opening of any protective doors while a machine is actually moving is prohibited When the door open signal is input from the PLC this function first decelerates stops all the control axes establishes the ready OFF status and then shuts off the drive power inside the servo drive units so that the motors are no longer driven With the door interlock function established by the door open II signal cycle start can be enabled even when the door open signal has been input However the axes will be set to the interlock status Description of operation When a door is open The NC system operates as follows when the door open II signal is inp
70. time a tool selection T command is specified for the tool If the counter reaches the limit number when a tool selection command is specified an alarm is given 14 2 1 2 Tool Life Management Il M system A L system A 1 M system A spare tool change function is added to Tool life management This function selects a usable tool out of the spare tools of the group determined by a tool selection T command then outputs data of such usable spare tool The spare tool can be selected in two ways the tools are selected in order they were registered in the group or the tool whose remaining life is the longest of all in the group is selected No of groups Max 100 sets No of tools in group 100 tools no limitation 2 L system The life of each tool time and frequency is controlled and when the life is reached a spare tool that is the same type is selected from the group where the tool belongs and used No of groups Max 40 sets each part system For 1 part system 80 sets No of tools in group Max 16 tools Il 178 14 Automation Support Functions 14 2 Tool Life Management 14 2 2 Number of Tool Life Management Sets The number of tools that can be managed for their lives are shown below These are fixed by the No of part systems according to the model 14 2 2 1 80 Sets M system L system A Maximum of 80 tools for one part system and maximum of 40 tools for two or more part systems 14 2 2 2 100 Set
71. 000 4000 to 4000 O to 12000 12000 to 12000 Digital Analog Converter Q68DAIN Output O to 20mADC Module User s Manual Conversion speed 80us channel SH NA 080054 18 point terminal block Transformer insulation between power supply and output modules c Voltage current output module 2 channels Input resolution O to 4000 4000 to 4000 O to 12000 12000 to 12000 16000 to 16000 Digital Analog Converter Q62DAN Output 10 to 10VDC 0 to 20mADC Module User s Manual Conversion speed 80us channel SH NA 080054 18 point terminal block Transformer insulation between power supply and output modules 2 channels Input resolution O to 12000 12000 to 12000 Channel Isolated Digital 16000 to 16000 Analog Converter Module Grape Output 12 to 12VDC O to 22mADC User s Manual Conversion speed 10ms 2channels SH NA 080281 18 point terminal block Channels are isolated 4 channels Input resolution O to 4000 4000 to 4000 O to 12000 12000 to 12000 16000 to 16000 Digital Analog Converter Q64DAN Output 10 to 10VDC O to 20mADC Module User s Manual Conversion speed 80us channel SH NA 080054 18 point terminal block Transformer insulation between power supply and output modules 10 Interrupt input module 16 points 24VDC 4mA I O module Type Building Response time 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 6 1ms Block User s Manual 16 points common 18 point terminal block SH NA 080042 10 1 System Configur
72. 000 Level 1 P1 Level 2 P2 Level 8 P8 M98 MO2 M3O0 8 level nesting Main program Subprogram P1 017 a M98 P1 H1 repetitions M98 P1 H100 ay pasaros g 59 I Return after five MO2 M30 M02 M30 repetitions Il 101 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 2 Macro Program 12 1 2 1 User Macro M system A 4 layers L system A 4 layers 1 Macro commands 1 G65 to G67 In order to execute one integrated function a group of control and arithmetic instructions can be used and registered as a macro program Furthermore subprograms with a high degree of expandability can be configured by setting these macro programs as types which are capable of conducting control and arithmetic operations using variable commands Macro call Sample call Macro modal call A Macro modal call B Macro modal call cancel The program formats are given below G65 Pp1 LI1 Argument G65 Call command Ppt Program No LI1 No of repetitions Argument Variable data assignment The macro program is called immediately by this command G66 Pp1 LI1 Argument G66 Call command Ppt Program No LI1 No of repetitions Argument Variable data assignment The macro program is executed from the block with the axis command following this command G66 1 Pp1 LI1 Argument G66 1 Call command Pp1 Program No LI1 No of repetitions Argument Variab
73. 01 lt Argument gt M02 05000 G90G01F1000 M99 Note 1 When prohibiting the display and edit of the macro program set the macro program No to O9000 to 09999 and change properly the parameter setting of edit lock C and the program display lock 12 1 2 102 Macro Interface Extension 1200 sets M system A L system A These variables enable direct reading writing of the data between CNC machining program and PLC program Il 109 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 3 Fixed Cycle List of fixed cycles Type of fixed cycle G code system G code system G code system 1 2 3 Fixed cycle for drilling Refer to 12 1 3 1 toric a Special fixed cycles Fixed cycles for turning machining Multiple repetitive fixed cycles for turning machining o as G76 2 Il 110 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 3 1 Fixed Cycle for Drilling M system O L system O 1 M system G70 to G89 G88 G99 These functions enable drilling tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1 block program Step cycle Reverse tapping cycle Fine boring Fixed cycle cancel Drilling spot drilling cycle Drilling counterboring cycle Deep hole drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle Backboring cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle There are two levels of hole machining axis return which appl
74. 0m cable 29 Connector A6CON1 Soldering type 32 point connector 40 pin connector Crimp contact type 32 point connector A6CON2 40 pin connector Flat cable pressure displacement type 32 point A6CON3 connector 40 pin connector I O module Type Building Block User s Manual SH NA 080042 Soldering type 32 point connector AGCONA 40 pin connector two way cable can be mounted Soldering type 32 point connector A6CON1E 37 pin D sub connector Crimp contact type 32 point connector A6CON2E 37 pin D sub connector Flat cable pressure displacement type 32 point A6BCONSE connector 37 pin D sub connector 20 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 30 Memory card QCPU user manual hard ware Q2MEM 2MBS Small SRAM memory card 2MB designing maintenance SH 080472 31 CC Link Remote l O unit a Thread terminal block type Input 32 points 24VDC positive negative common AJ65SBTB1 32D shared type CC Link System Compact Type 1 wire terminal block type response time 1 5 ms Remote I O Module User s ints i Manual SH 4007 Ee Output 32 points 12 24VDC 0 5A transistor output ual source type 1 wire terminal block type b Waterproof connector type Modeiname Remas Reene Input 16 points 24VDC negative common 4 wire A Da super slim waterproof type response time 1 5 ms CC Link System Compact Type Remote I O Module User s AJ65FBTA2 16TE Outpu
75. 1 1 Format 1 for Lathe 2 1 Data Increment 2 1 1 Least Command Increment 2 3 1 2 Format 2 for Lathe 2 1 1 1 Least Command Increment 1uM 2 4 Command Value 2 4 1 Decimal Point Input I Il 2 4 2 Absolute Incremental Command 2 3 1 4 Format 1 for Machining Center 2 4 3 Diameter Radius Designation 3 1 Positioning 3 2 5 Cylindrical Interpolation 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation 2 2 1 Inch Metric Changeover Ses EEE 3 2 101 Hypothetical Linear Axis Control DAA 0 10 10 NIN 3 5 o O Standerd A Option O Selection C70 Series Class Page MAA E E A HATE E O Aayo 4 1 1 Rapid Traverse Rate m min 4 1 2 Cutting Feed Rate m min 4 1 3 Manual Feed Rate m min 41 4 Rotary Axis Command Speed Tenfold _Oo O y ai 4 2 Feed Rate Input Methods o o o O Ayo 42 1 Feed per Minute o S O o y Aio 42 2 Feed per Revolution o A pj oO pa 424FidigitFeed Sr OO 4 3 Override E E O 7yo 4 3 1 Rapid Traverse Override o S ao pp o 2 43 2 Cutting Feed Override SJ ao pp o 2 4 3 3 2nd Cutting Feed Override SOS ao pp o 2 43 4 Override Cancel E o o S 2 4 4 Acceleration Decelerati on_ SS pos 44 1 Automatic Acceleration Deceleration after Interpolation CT COC O 8 44 2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration Deceleration O O O 30 CATIA 8 4 5 1 Thread Cutting Lead Thread Number Designation JA O 32 o o 4 5 2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting gt poo a
76. 1 Yy1 li1 GO Zr1 G1 Zq1 Ff1 M4 Spindle reverse rotation G1 Z m Ffi M3 Spindle forward rotation G1 Z q1 m Ff1 M4 Spindle reverse rotation G1 Z m Ffi M3 Spindle forward rotation G1 Z q1 m Ff1 Dusan CES a i i e O x G1 Z z1 q1 n Ff1 G4 Pp1 M4 Spindle reverse rotation G1 Z z1 Ff1 Ss2 G4 Pp1 M3 Spindle forward rotation G98 mode GO Z r1 lj1 G99 mode No movement 6 m 5 27 i 10 me 11 8 j 11 n1 n2 n3 G98 G99 mode mode 1 m Parameter 2 This program is for the G84 command The spindle forward rotation M3 and reverse rotation M4 are reversed with the G74 command Il 36 4 Feed 4 5 Thread Cutting 4 5 3 102 Multi Spindle Synchronous Tapping M system A L system A This function enables the synchronous tapping on several spindles and is efficient for the tapping machining All consisting spindles can be designated The command format is same as that of the normal synchronous tapping Il 37 4 Feed 4 5 Thread Cutting 4 5 4 Chamfering M system L system O Chamfering can be validated during the thread cutting cycle by using external signals The chamfer amount and angle are designated with parameters Thread cutting cycle Chamfer angle Chamfer amount 4 5 8 High speed Synchronous Tapping OMR DD M system A L system A The servo axis directly detects and compensates the spindle s delay in tracking
77. 10 during initial inching The commanded speeds are as follow Automatic operation Cutting feed rate For the inch system the rotary axis command speed is multiplied by 10 For example if the B axis is the rotary axis in the inch system and the following type of machining program is executed the rotary axis command speed will be multiplied by 10 and the rotary axis will move at 1000 deg min N1 G1 B100 F100 Rapid traverse rate The rapid traverse rate is not multiplied by 10 and is the speed set in the parameters Manual operation The command speeds related to manual operation such as JOG feed are not multiplied by 10 The display speed unit also remains as deg min Il 23 4 Feed 4 2 Feed Rate Input Methods 4 2 Feed Rate Input Methods 4 2 1 Feed per Minute M system O L system O M system By issuing the G94 command the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F as the feed rate per minute mm min inch min Metric input mm Least input increment B 0 001 mm C 0 0001 mm F command increment mm min Command range mm min 0 01 1000000 000 0 001 100000 000 without decimal point F1 1 mm min F1 1 mm min with decimal point F1 1 mm min F1 1 mm min Inch input inch Least input increment B 0 0001 inch C 0 00001 inch F command increment inch min Command range inch min 0 001 100000 0000 0 001 10000 0000 e When commands without a decimal
78. 2 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 8 6 Balance Cut M system L system O When a workpiece that is relatively long and thin is machined on a lathe deflection may result making it impossible for the workpiece to be machined with any accuracy In cases like this the deflection can be minimized by holding tools simultaneously from both sides of the workpiece and using them in synchronization to machine the workpiece balance cutting This method has an additional advantage since the workpiece is machined by two tools the machining time is reduced The balance cutting function enables the movements of the tool rests belonging to part system 1 and part system 2 to be synchronized at the block start timing so that this kind of machining can easily be accomplished Part system 1 Part system 2 The command format is given below G14 Balance cut command OFF modal G15 Balance cut command ON modal G14 and G15 are modal commands When the G15 command is assigned the programmed operations of two part systems are synchronized at the block start timing for all blocks until the G14 command is assigned or until the modal information is cleared by the reset signal Part system 1 program Part system 2 program T0101 T0102 GOO X_ Z GOO X_Z G15 G15 G01 Z_F0 4 G01 Z_F0 4 Whereas synchronization is possible only with the next block when using the code of synchronization betwee
79. 2000 1 117X or later 22 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules c GT2708 8 4 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display 65536 colors lt Multimedia and video RGB and multi touch supported gt GT2708 STBA 100 240VAC user memory memory for storage ROM 57MB operation memory RAM 128MB Requiring GT Designer3 Version1 GOT2000 1 117X or later GT27 General Description IB 8 4 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid 0800502 crystal display 65536 colors lt Multimedia and video RGB and multi touch supported gt GT2708 STBD 24VDC user memory memory for storage ROM 57MB operation memory RAM 128MB Requiring GT Designer3 Version1 GOT2000 1 117X or later 2 SD card Modelmame Remas Reference L1MEM 2GBSD 2GB SD memory card for GOT EO 3 Protection sheet GT25 12PSCC Protection sheet for 12 1 type Clear 5 sheets GOT2000 Series Protective GT25 10PSCC Protection sheet for 10 4 type Clear 5 sheets Sheet for GT27 GT25 GT23 GT25 08PSCC Protection sheet for 8 4 type Clear 5 sheets User s Manual IB 0800499 23 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 1 3 2 2 GT16 1 GOT a GT1695M 15 0 type XGA 1024 x 768 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1695M XTBA wide angle view 65536 colors lt Multi media and video RGB supported gt 100 240VAC built in flash memory 15MB GT16 General Description 15 0 type XGA
80. 30 000 hours 5 00 years 25 days a 3 42years 43 800 hours 0 19 100 hours 2 18years 27 200 hours o QO6UDVCPU 2MBS goy 38 200 hours Q13UDVCPU i 4 36 years gt oO 00 O O 3 O Cc 02 100 5 00 years 10 000 hours 1 14 years 3 14 200 hours 1 62 years Q4MCA 50 20 000 hours 8MBS i 2 28 years 33 300 hours o we 3 80 years 43 800 hours o 100 5 00 years 41 o oS O SS 43 800 hours 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days 2 General Specifications g i Ze si 4 2 4 PLC CPU The frequency of battery usage indicated battery consumption of PLC CPU Target CPU modules for QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU and QO6UDHCPU are the first 5 digits of the serial No is 10012 or later The bigger the frequency of battery usage is the higher amount of battery per unit time is consumed The frequency of battery usage depends on the elements a and b The following table shows the relationship between the combination pattern of a and b and the frequency of battery usage Elemets to decide how much battery is used Frequency of b State of a file storage during standard RAM battery usage a Battery long life function Note Size of a register file during RAM SR lt Unit word With seting No file register or Ok lt SR lt 128k Without setting 128k lt SR lt 384k 384k lt SR Note Refer to the following manual for battery long life function QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explan
81. 5 S Ka ae operation Other part system Designated start point Own part system IG115 Synchronized operation Other part system Designated start point c When the start point designated by G115 is not on the next block movement path of the other part system the own part system starts once the other part system has reached all of the start point axis coordinates X also has passed O Z has passed Q O gt Movement O Command point A Actual start point Il 151 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 2 Start point designation synchronization Type 2 G116 Command format Synchronizing command G command Other start point designate own part system s coordinate value a The own part system starts first when synchronizing is executed b The other part system waits for the own part system to move and reach the designated start point and then starts Designated start point Other part system Designated start pojnt Own part system 3b Synchronized operation Other part system l c When the start point designated by G116 is not on the next block movement path of the own part system the other part system starts once the own part system has reached all of the start point axis coordinates X also has passed L O Z has passed Q O Z be lt lt Movement O Command point A Actual start point Il 152 1
82. 59 48 workpiece coordinate systems can be used by assigning G54 1Pn command The command format to select the workpiece coordinate system using the G54 1Pn command and to move on the workpiece coordinate system are given below G90 G54 1Pn GOO Xx1 Yy1 Zzl G90 Absolute command G54 1Pn Coordinate system selection G00 Movement mode Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Coordinate position of end point The numerical value n of P following G54 1 indicates each workpiece coordinate system Specify a value between 1 and 48 The workpiece coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the machine coordinate system Settings can be performed in one of the following three ways a Setting using the setting and display unit b Setting using commands assigned from the machining program c Setting from the user PLC Note 1 While the G54 1Pn extended workpiece coordinate system selection is modal the local coordinate offset is reduced to zero and the G52 command cannot be used Il 79 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 5 External Workpiece Coordinate Offset M system O L system O An external workpiece coordinate offset that serves as a reference for all the workpiece coordinate systems is avallable outside the workpiece coordinates By setting the external workpiece coordinate offset the external workpiece coordinate system can be shifted from the machine coordinate system
83. 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days w dh SS uo O O lt gt DO oc o O N Y 43 800 hours 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days No gt S w No z gt on OO 00 de 00 OO 00 No Oo O O O O O O O O O O O O O D D TY D D gt O O O O O O Cc a c G G cap Fa mm mm mm 09 UN 0 io op UN gt oO O O 00 O O O O O gt y O O Cc Cc pp pp 02 02 100 0 o Q4MCA 50 E 43 800 hours 600 hours 8MBS 2 30 years 5 00 years 25 days 7 33 600 hours 3 83 years dl O O lt 9 Q nm gt O D gt J O O Cc E nm nm N O N O O g O Cc m 02 O ES 43 800 hours 0 O 5 00 years 40 2 General Specifications 2 4 PLC CPU Battery life Backup power time after an alarm 5 Extended SRAM cassette PLC CPU module type Power ON merafio 2 Guaranteed Actual service value value 3 Reference value 4 30 600 hours 30 Not used i 100 Y O o 30 700 hours o 1MBS oy 43 000 hours 100 5 00 years 0 0 gt 0 Palo o o o O lt als 0 oO v Z gt 3 TY Nn N Y 43 800 hours 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days N dl O O O Cc 02 43 800 hours 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days 43 800 hours 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days Q26UDVCPU 43 800 hours 100 5 00 years 15 000 hours 0 j 30 21 400 hours 0 Q4MCA 2 44 years 43 800 hours 600 hours 4MBS 50
84. 84hr n 2300920 so 3200m 27400 SI 70 E 100 43 00h E so 32200m 43800 600k 50 A3800 4380r 800 100 e OO A 202000 IAN so 8200m 4380r 38i 7o S e I e 18500 IO 30 3200m 2650r 10a s E SI 100 e TSI E S sonj 3000m 2760r a 5 000hr 43 800hr 144hr 100 43 800hr 43 800hr 144hr 38 2 General Specifications 2 4 PLC CPU Battery life Backup power time after an alarm 5 41 400 hours 0 J Unused 43 800 hours 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days Q4MCA 1MBS 23 100 hours o 33 000 hours Q4MCA 3 76 years 43 800 hours 600 hours 2MBS 5 00 years 25 days QO3UDVCPU Q4MCA 43 800 hours 600 hours 4MBS 5 00 years 25 days Q4MCA 43 800 hours 600 hours 8MBS l 5 00 years 25 days 39 Extended SRAM Power ON dmeratio 72 Guaranteed Actual service value cassette value 3 Reference value 4 43 800 hours 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days 2 General Specifications 2 4 PLC CPU Battery life Power ON l Backup power time ratio 2 Guaranteed Actual service value fc ate ad value 3 Reference value 4 y alarm 5 Not used 43 800 hours 600 hours 5 00 years 25 days 1MBS 0 J 2MBS o Q04UDVCPU 100 5 00 years o 30 Q4MCA 2 48 years 43 800 hours 600 hours 4MBS 50 l 5 00 years 25 days 3 49years Extended SRAM cassette PLC CPU module type N N O O O DE O Cc pp 02 N dl os lt 9 Q nm 3 43 800 hours
85. 8mA 100VAC 60Hz 7MA 100VAC 50Hz Response time 20ms 8 points common 18 point terminal block b DC positive common type 16 points 24VDC 4mA QX40 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms 16 points common Positive common type 18 point terminal block 16 points 24VDC 6mA Response time 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 6 1ms ee 16 points common Positive common type 18 point terminal block 32 points 24VDC 4mA QX41 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms 32 points common Positive common type ae 40 pin connector I O module Type Building Block User s Manual 32 points 24VDC 4mA SH NA 080042 QX41 S1 Response time 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 6 1ms 32 points common Positive common type 40 pin connector 64 points 24VDC 4mA QX42 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms 32 points common Positive common type 40 pin connector 64 points 24VDC 4mA Response time 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 6 1ms 32 points common Positive common type 40 pin connector QX42 51 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules c DC sensor 16 points 5 12VDC 1 2mA 5VDC 3 3mA 12VDC QX70 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms 16 points common Positive negative common type 18 point terminal block 32 points 5 12VDC 1 2mA 5VDC 3 3mA 12VDC VO module Type Building QX71 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms Be Users MARUAI 32 points common Positive negative common type SH NA 080042 40 pin connector 64 points 5 12VDC 1 2mA 5VDC 3 3mA 12VDC QX72 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms 32 points common Pos
86. A 88 153 24 Stored Stroke LimitiC A889 15 3 4 Chuck Tailstock BarrierCheck 190 15 3 5 interlock 81 15 3 6 External Deceleration 81 15 3 9 Door Interlock EE EE S ae 15391 DoorIntertek lO O poo y te 159 2 Door Interlock OOOO OOOO poo te 15 310 Parameter Lock Poo poo y ta 15 3 11 Program Protection Edit Lock B C PS OS O OS O 194 15 3 12 Program Display Loko po ta 15 3 13 Safety Observation r S k 95 O Standerd A Option O Selection C70 Series Class Page 15 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 22 y S S 15 4 1 Operation History 8986 15 4 2 Data Sampling Ot 19868 15 4 3 NC Data Backup OOO pp O A e 15 4 5 Servo Tuning Support Tools SS por a o 15 4 5 1 MS Configulator Need to prepare separate S W 15 4 5 2 NC Analyzer 15 4 13 1 NC Configurator2 15 4 102 Backup 15 413 Parameter Setting Too a SINE 16 Drive System 16 1 Servo Spindle A E 16 1 1 Feed Axis es eS 16 1 1 1 MDS D V1 D V2 200V 16 1 1 1 1 Servo Motor HF A48 260kp Rev 16 1 1 1 6 Servo Motor HF KP JW04 260kp rev HF memas MDS D SV48 0V O O O OoOo oOo oo o o oS S O 16 1 1 3 1 Servo Motor HF A48 260kp rev o O O 16 1 1 3 3 Servo Motor HF KP JWO4 260kp rev oS O O 16 1 1 6 1 Servo Motor HF H A48 260kp rev 16 1 1 7 1 Servo Motor HF A48 260kp rev 16 1 2 Spindle 16 1 2 1 MDS D SP 200V 16 1 2 2 MDS DH SP 400V 1 1 A oo AAA AAA 16 1 2 3 MDS D SPJ3 SPJ3
87. AX 1 732 560 4531 Connecticut Service Satellite TORRINGTON CONNECTICUT 06790 U S A TEL 1 732 560 4500 FAX 1 732 560 4531 South Region Service Center 1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE 450 DULUTH GEORGIA 30097 U S A TEL 1 678 258 4529 FAX 1 678 258 4519 Texas Service Satellites GRAPEVINE TEXAS 76051 U S A TEL 1 678 258 4529 FAX 1 678 258 4519 HOUSTON TEXAS 77001 U S A TEL 1 678 258 4529 FAX 1 678 258 4519 Tennessee Service Satellite Nashville Tennessee 37201 U S A TEL 1 678 258 4529 FAX 1 678 258 4519 Florida Service Satellite WEST MELBOURNE FLORIDA 32904 U S A TEL 1 678 258 4529 FAX 1 678 258 4519 Canada Region Service Center 4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM ONTARIO L3R OJ2 CANADA TEL 1 905 475 7728 FAX 1 905 475 7935 Canada Service Satellite EDMONTON ALBERTA T5A 0A1 CANADA TEL 1 905 475 7728 FAX 1 905 475 7935 Mexico Region Service Center MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA 54030 EDO DE MEXICO TEL 52 55 3067 7500 FAX 52 55 9171 7649 Monterrey Service Satellite MONTERREY N L 64720 MEXICO TEL 52 81 8365 4171 El 3 Y4 8 MELCO CNC do Brasil Com rcio e Servicos S A Brazil Region Service Center ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI KM 2 1 CEP 18550 000 BOITUVA SP BRAZIL TEL 55 15 3363 9900 FAX 55 15 3363 9911 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V GOTHAER STRASSE 10 40880 RATINGEN GERMANY TEL 49 2102 486 0 FAX 49 2102 486 5910 Germany Service Center KURZ
88. As the offset amounts the tool length along the X Z axes and additional axis and the wear amount along each of these axes the nose radius and nose radius wear amount tool tip point P and tool width can be registered Offset is provided in the directions of the X Z axes and additional axis from the base position in the program Generally the center of the tool rest or the tip of the base tool is used as the programmed base position 1 The programmed base position is the 2 The programmed base position is the tip of the center of the tool rest base tool Base position wee tool base point oe Base position l Tool used for EAE base point machining length offset PR amount A X axis tool length offset amount Z axis tool length offset amount Z axis tool length offset amount The tool tip contour arc radius nose radius of a non rotary tool with an arc nose radius at its tip is registered as the nose radius offset amount Tool nose center Tool nose Nose radius compensation X axis tool length P wear offset amount Imaginary tool nose point _ Z axis tool length wear offset The X axis tool length offset amount Z axis tool length offset amount and nose radius compensation amount are set as plus amounts The offset type 1 2 or 3 is set using a parameter Il 73 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type a
89. B Mistakes were corrected May 2007 NA 1500259 C The following sections are added e 16 Drive System 17 Machine Support Functions Other contents were added revised deleted according to specification Sep 2010 IB NA 1500259 D Added Changed the following chapters in order to support C70 software B2version Following contents were revised Updated the contents of GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Following chapters were added to Il FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 101 Hypothetical Linear Axis Control 4 5 8 High speed Synchronous Tapping OMR DD 6 1 2 Color Display GOT 6 2 3 Single NC and Multi display Unit Switch 6 2 4 Multi NC and Common display Unit 6 2 10 Screen Saver Backlight OFF 6 2 15 Screen Capture 8 1 1 2 Spindle Analog I F 11 1 2 Optional Block Skip Addition 12 1 2 102 Macro Interface Extension 1200 sets 12 1 7 1 Chopping 12 3 1 High speed Machining Mode I G5P1 kBPM 16 1 1 4 MDS DM V3 SPV2 SPV3 200V 17 1 2 3 Built in PLC Processing Mode 17 1 3 6 Multi ladder Program Register and Execution 17 1 3 7 Ladder Program Writing during RUN 17 1 3 8 PLC Protection 17 1 7 3 MELSEC Development Tool GX Simulator 17 1 9 1 CPU Direct Connection RS 422 RS 232C 17 1 9 2 CC Link Connection Remote device 17 1 9 3 CC Link Connection Intelligent terminal 17 5 Machine Contact Input output I F 17 5 1 Additional DI DO DI 32 DO 32 17 6 4 PROFIBUS DP Master 17 6 8 CC Link IE 17 8 2 1 Remote monitor tool 17 8 3 Cycle Moni
90. C Link IE Optical double loop interface module Gree 1000BASE SX Control normal station CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Optical double loop interface module Reference Manual QJ71GP21S SX 1000BASE SX Control normal station SH NA 080668 With external power supply 14 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 20 FL net OPCN 2 a Ver 2 00 Mod mame JO mars O Reterene QJ71FL71 T F0O1 10BASE T 100BASE TX FL net OPCN 2 Interface QJ71FL71 B2 F01 10BASE2 Module User s Manual QJ71FL71 B5 F01 10BASE5 SH NA 080350E b Ver 1 00 Modetname Remas O Reterenos QJ71FL71 T 10BASE T FL net OPCN 2 Interface QJ71FL71 B2 10BASE2 Module User s Manual QJ71FL71 B5 10BASE5 SH NA 080350E 21 AS i AS i Master Module User s QJ71AS92 Master station Manual Hardware IB NA 0800122E 22 Extension base Modeiname Remas O Reterenos 3 slots for mounting Q series modules Q63B l l including power supply module 5 slots for mounting Q series modules Q65B l including power supply module 068B 8 slots for mounting Q series modules QCPU User s Manual including power supply module Hardware Design 0612B 12 slots for mounting Q series modules Maintenance and Inspection including power supply module SH NA 080483ENG 2 slots for mounting Q series modules Q52B i excluding power supply module 5 slots for mounting Q series modules Q55B excluding power supply module 15 1
91. C input 5VDC 8 5A output Q64P 100 to 120VAC 200 to 240VAC input 5VDC 8 5A output INPUT o o O O O O O O O O Oi O A Pp A o 6 oy 6 Q63P Q61P Q64PN Q64P 1 POWER LED Q61P Q64PN Q64P ON green Normal 5VDC output instantaneous power failure within 20ms OFF The power supply module is out of order while AC power supply is ON 5VDC error internal circuit failure blown fuse Over current protection or over voltage protection operated AC power supply is not ON Power failure including an instantaneous power failure of more than 20ms Q63P ON green Normal 5VDC output instantaneous power failure within 10ms OFF The power supply module is out of order while DC power supply is ON 5VDC error internal circuit failure blown fuse Over current protection or over voltage protection operated DC power supply is not ON Power failure including an instantaneous power failure of more than 10ms 2 ERR terminal Q61P Q64PN Q64P Turned ON when the whole system operates normally This terminal turns OFF opens when the AC power is not input a stop error including a reset occurs in the CPU module or the fuse is blown Ina Multiple CPU system configuration turned OFF when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules Normally OFF when loaded in an extension base unit Turned ON when the whole system operates normally This terminal turns OFF opens when the DC p
92. COW RUSSIA TEL 7 495 748 0191 FAX 7 495 748 0192 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V SCANDINAVIA Sweden Service Center HAMMARBACKEN 14 191 49 SOLLENTUNA SWEDEN TEL 46 8 6251000 FAX 46 8 966877 Bulgaria Service Center 4 A LYAPCHEV BOUL POB 21 BG 1756 SOFIA BULGARIA TEL 359 2 8176009 FAX 359 2 9744061 Ukraine Kharkov Service Center APTEKARSKIY LANE 9 A OFFICE 3 61001 KHARKOV UKRAINE TEL 380 57 732 7774 FAX 380 57 731 8721 Ukraine Kiev Service Center 4 B M RASKOVOYI STR 02660 KIEV UKRAINE TEL 380 44 494 3355 FAX 380 44 494 3366 Belarus Service Center OFFICE 9 NEZAVISIMOSTI PR 177 220125 MINSK BELARUS TEL 375 17 393 1177 FAX 375 17 393 0081 South Africa Service Center 5 ALBATROSS STREET RHODESFIELD KEMPTON PARK 1619 GAUTENG SOUTH AFRICA TEL 27 11 394 8512 FAX 27 11 394 8513 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE LTD ASEAN FA CENTER Singapore Service Center 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD 05 01 02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 TEL 65 6473 2308 FAX 65 6476 7439 Malaysia KL Service Center 60 JALAN USJ 10 1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN MALAYSIA TEL 60 3 5631 7605 FAX 60 3 5631 7636 Malaysia Johor Baru Service Center 17 amp 17A JALAN IMPIAN EMAS 5 5 TAMAN IMPIAN EMAS 81300 SKUDAI JOHOR MALAYSIA TEL 60 7 557 8218 FAX 60 7 557 3404 Philippines Service Center UNIT NO 411 ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25 WEST SERVICE ROAD SOUTH
93. Changes for the Better MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI CNC Specifications Manual C70 IB 1500259 ENG H Introduction This manual describes the specifications of CNC C70 To safely use this CNC module thoroughly study the Precautions for Safety on the next page before use Details described in this manual At the beginning of each item a table indicating it s specification according to the model Standard A Optional LO Selection AN CAUTION A The items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as not possible A This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added A Some functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on the NC system software version General precautions 1 When the contents of this manual is updated the version A B on the cover will be incremented 2 In this manual the machining center system is described as M system and the lathe system is described as L system Precautions for Safety Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker this manual related manuals and attached documents before installation operation programming maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use Understand this numerical controller safety items and cautions before using the unit This manual ranks the safety precautions into Danger Warning and Caution When there is a great risk that the user could be subje
94. E STRASSE 40 70794 FILDERSTADT BONLANDEN GERMANY TEL 49 711 770598 123 FAX 49 711 770598 141 France Service Center DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE 25 BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE TEL 33 1 41 02 83 13 FAX 33 1 49 01 07 25 France Lyon Service Satellite DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE 120 ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE TEL 33 1 41 02 83 13 FAX 33 1 49 01 07 25 Italy Service Center VIALE COLLEONI 7 CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI PALAZZO SIRIO INGRESSO 1 20864 AGRATE BRIANZA MB ITALY TEL 39 039 6053 342 FAX 39 039 6053 206 Italy Padova Service Satellite VIA G SAVELLI 24 35129 PADOVA ITALY TEL 39 039 6053 342 FAX 39 039 6053 206 U K Branch TRAVELLERS LANE HATFIELD HERTFORDSHIRE AL10 8XB U K TEL 49 2102 486 0 FAX 49 2102 486 5910 Spain Service Center CTRA DE RUBI 76 80 APDO 420 08173 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES BARCELONA SPAIN TEL 34 935 65 2236 FAX 34 935 89 1579 Poland Service Center UL KRAKOWSKA 50 32 083 BALICE POLAND TEL 48 12 630 4700 FAX 48 12 630 4701 Mitsubishi Electric Turkey A S Umraniye Subesi Turkey Service Center SERIFALI MAH NUTUK SOK NO 5 34775 MRANIYE ISTANBUL TURKEY TEL 90 216 526 3990 FAX 90 216 526 3995 Czech Republic Service Center KAFKOVA 1853 3 702 00 OSTRAVA 2 CZECH REPUBLIC TEL 420 59 5691 185 FAX 420 59 5691 199 Russia Service Center 213 BNOVODMITROVSKAYA STR 14 2 127015 MOS
95. French 12 1 2 2 Machine Tool Builder Macro 15 4 5 2 NC Analyzer 15 4 13 Parameter Setting Tool Following sections were deleted from II FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 9 3 1 4 Tool Offset Amount 100 sets Following sections in II FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS are rewritten 11 4 4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract 15 3 13 Safety Observation 15 4 5 1 MS Configurator 16 Drive System 17 2 5 Position Switch Following sections were re numbered 9 3 1 4 Tool Offset Amount 200 Sets formerly 9 3 1 5 Minor errors were corrected Global Service Network MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC AMERICA FA CENTER Central Region Service Center 500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY VERNON HILLS ILLINOIS 60061 U S A TEL 1 847 478 2500 FAX 1 847 478 2650 Michigan Service Satellite ALLEGAN MICHIGAN 49010 U S A TEL 1 847 478 2500 FAX 1 847 478 2650 Ohio Service Satellite LIMA OHIO 45801 U S A TEL 1 847 478 2500 FAX 1 847 478 2650 CINCINATTI OHIO 45201 U S A TEL 1 847 478 2500 FAX 1 847 478 2650 Minnesota Service Satellite ROGERS MINNESOTA 55374 U S A TEL 1 847 478 2500 FAX 1 847 478 2650 West Region Service Center 16900 VALLEY VIEW AVE LAMIRADA CALIFORNIA 90638 U S A TEL 1 714 699 2625 FAX 1 847 478 2650 Northern CA Satellite SARATOGA CALIFORNIA 95070 U S A TEL 1 714 699 2625 FAX 1 847 478 2650 Pennsylvania Service Satellite PITTSBURG PENNSYLVANIA 15644 U S A TEL 1 732 560 4500 F
96. If this device is activated switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short Then a few minutes later switch it on to restart the system The initial start for the system takes place when the current value becomes normal Overvoltage protection The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5VDC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5 5VDC or more is applied to the circuit When this device is activated the power supply module LED is switched OFF To restart the system switch the input power OFF then a few minutes later ON The initial start for the system will take place The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains OFF Permissible instantaneous power off time 1 For AC input power supply a An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 20ms will cause AC down to be detected but operation will continue b An instantaneous power failure lasting in excess of 20ms may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load Further when the AC supply of the AC input module is the same as that of the power supply module it prevents the sensor connected to the AC input module which is ON at power off from turning OFF by switching off the power supply However if only the AC input module is connected to the AC line which is connected to the power supply detection of the AC down f
97. Motor side de tector relay cable motor side 0 3m load side angle Compatible with only IP65 CNV22J K2P For HF KP Servo Motor side de 0 3M tector relay cable motor side 0 3m reverse load side angle l Compatible with only IP65 For HF HF H HF KP Tool spin dle Motor side detector cable for CNV2E 8P oM A48 A51 A74N A74 30m 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 20 25 30 For HF KP Servo Motor side de tector relay cable Drive unit side For HF HF H HF KP Tool spin CNV2E 9P oM dle Motor side detector cable for A48 A51 A74N A74 CNV2E D 9M MDS B SD unit cable 30m 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 20 25 30 ON CNV2E HP oM MDS B HR unit cable 30m 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 20 25 30 AAN CNV2E Kip For HF KP Servo Motor side de M tector cable E Compatible with only IP65 CNV22J K1P 0 3M 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 20 25 30 OO 3 2 3 5 7 10 load side angle For HF KP Servo Motor side de ice tector cable 10m 2 3 5 7 10 reverse load side angle Compatible with only IP65 DG21 cM Battery cable on 0 3 0 5 1 5 For drive unit except MDS DJ Series battery unit For servo drive unit servo drive unit ex cept MDS DJ Series 0 3 0 5 1 5 Note This cable is required to supply the power from the battery unit to multiple gl 3 al al drive units DG22 o0M Battery cable DG23 oM Battery cable DG24 oM 5V spply DO output cable MR lt 200V Series gt Brake cable for HF KP For servo drive
98. NA 200V ay o 16 1 2 5 MDS DM SPV2 SPV3 200V DONNE es SPAN VANA AOS _ em q 16 1 4 5 AC Reactor for Power Supply 196 196 196 201 201 AA O er 16 1 4 6 Ground Plate tt O Standerd A Option O Selection C70 Series Class Page 17 Machine Support Funetions 202 A 202 MAA E E E 202 17 1 2 101 Builtin PLC Processing Mode________________________ __0o _ __O _ 17 1 3 PLC SupportFunctions 204 a 1130k 40k 60k 100k L130k 40k 60k 100k 171 6 Ladder Monitor 204 17 4 7 PLC Development o 205 O ee NO 17 1 9 GOT Connection 17 2 Machine Construction 17 2 1 Servo OFF 205 205 206 i o po 17 2 2 Axis Detachment S S _A e A ___ 27 AA gt as A 2 n 2 2 2 2 2 23 O 2 214 17 2 3 Synchronous Control s a 17 2 5 Position Switch 24 for each part system 24 for each part system 16 for PLC axis 16 for PLC axis A pas O 217 28 29 17 3 1 Arbitrary Feed in Manual Mode 17 3 3 PLC Axis Control 17 3 5 PLC Axis Indexing 17 3 101 NC Axis PLC Axis Changeover O 2 i A a 3 OA o ee 3 pA ATA PLC Interface o e e 17 44 CNC Control Signal OOO poo 17 42 CNC Status Signal OOO pp Oo a AO Window A Yo 4 17 4 4 External Search OOOO AO Yo A 17 6 External PLC Link AAA 17 6 6 FL net A MELSEC A MELSEC 17 6 8 CC Link IE A MELSEC A MELSEC 17 6 7 CC Link LT A MELSEC A MELSEC 17 7 Installing S W for Machine
99. NDA MPG _ 204 5VDC 1 EAS Io Maz 2200 HA1 200 0 e _ gt D gt iG 0 1uF Il m 220Q HB1 45 Ot e e gt o VD 0 1uF ssvoc Io eS I 4709 2202 HA2 19 O e __ L gt o D 5VDC 26 E Dane 470Q ov 2209 HB2 440 n gt o SG 0V 15 O Oii SG 0V 40 0O e TON NE 5VDC 5VDC 2 o 4709 2209 HA3 18 O e _ ne gt PD 27 O T 0 14F 470 Q ov 220Q HB3 43 O e 7 v gt o sG ov 17 O a 0 1uF SG OV 42 O 9 ov EE 10kQ SKIP1 24 10kQ skiP2 49 T0k SkIP3 2 10kQ SKIP4 50 SKIPCOM 23 SKIPCOM 48 Of Manual pulse generator I F specification Input pulse signal type 90 phase difference between HA1 and HB1 Max input pulse frequency 5kHz Number of pulses per rotation 100pulse rev Input signal voltage H level 3 5V to 5 25V L level OV to 0 5V Output power voltage 5VDC 10 10 Max output current 100mA Note The connector MPG and EXT I F have input pins for HA1 and HB1 Use either of the connectors HA1 HB1 HB1 HA1 an a a T lt gt a b c d e HA1 or HB1 rising edge falling edge phase difference T 4 T 10 T HA1 or HB1 cycle Min 10 ws SKIP I F specification Input ON voltage 18V or more to 25 2V or less Ton gt 2ms Input ON current 2mA or more HACE Input OFF voltage 4V or less Input OFF current 0 4mA or less Input signal holding time Ton 2ms or OV t mo
100. ON the MOO M01 M02 and M30 commands among the miscellaneous functions are executed and the decode signal code data and strobe signals are also output as they would be normally 4 Any miscellaneous functions which are executed only inside the controller and not output M96 M97 M98 M99 are executed as they would be normally even if this signal is ON Il 92 11 Operation Support Functions 11 3 Program Search Start Stop 11 3 Program Search Start Stop 11 3 1 Program Search M system O L system O The program No of the program to be operated automatically can be designated and called up Upon completion of search the head of the program searched is displayed Machining programs are stored in the memory inside the NC system 11 3 2 Sequence Number Search M system O L system O Blocks can be indexed by setting the program No sequence No and block No of the program to be operated automatically The searched program is displayed upon completion of the search Machining programs are stored in the memory inside the NC system 11 3 4 Program Restart M system A L system A When resuming a machining program after a suspension due to tool damage or other reasons this function searches the program and the block to be resumed and enables machining to be resumed from the block This search function is different from the regular operation search in that this runs a program search while updating coordinate values and modal data as wh
101. P ATC K7 K8 Magazine stop gt Tool change D P ATC K3 Tool change command Arbitrary position tool change D P ATC K4 17 1 2 101 Built in PLC Processing Mode M system O L system O This function is used when executing safety observation of significant signals using a dual signal module Refer to the documents of safety observation function for details II 203 17 Machine Support Functions 17 1 PLC 17 1 3 PLC Support Functions 17 1 3 6 Multi ladder Program Register and Execution M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Two or more PLC programs can be stored and executed 17 1 3 7 Ladder Program Writing during RUN M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Ladder program can be written while CPU unit is running 17 1 3 8 PLC Protection M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC Read and writing of PLC program and device comments can be prohibited 17 1 4 Built in PLC Capacity M system O 30k 40k 60k 130k 260k L system O 30k 40k 60k 130k 260k Parameters intelligent function unit parameters programs device comments and system area set by user can be stored in a program memory 17 1 5 Machine Contact Input Output I F M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC The device is selected from the I O unit of MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller MELSEC Q Series Follow the manual of the I O unit about the method of handling 17 1 6 Ladder Monitor M system O L system O This function e
102. Q Corresponding MELSEC QJ71E71 B2 10BASE2 Communication Protocol Reference Manual QJ71E71 B5 10BASE5 SH NA 080008 15 Serial communication RS 232 1 channel RS 422 485 1 channel QJ71C24N aay l Transmission rate 230 4kbps Total Q Corresponding Serial RS 232 2 channels Communication Module A ARRE Transmission rate 230 4kbps Total User s Manual Basic RA RS 422 485 2 channels SH NA 080006 Transmission rate 230 4kbps Total 12 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 16 MES interface module 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1 channel MES Interface Module User s QJ71MES96 Note MX MESInterface and CF card are separately Manual required SH NA 080644ENG 17 MELSECNET H a SI QSI optical interface SI QSI H PCF Broad band H PCF optical cable Q Corresponding Double loop MELSECNET H Network meee PLC to PLC network control normal station System Reference Remote I O net remote master station Manual PLC to PLC network SI QSI H PCF Broad band H PCF optical cable SH NA 080049 Double loop Q Corresponding QJ71LP21S 25 PLC to PLC network control normal station y MELSECNET H Network Remote I O net remote master station System Reference With external supply power Manual Remote I O network SH NA 080124 SI QSI H PCF Broad band H PCF optical cable For QnA Q4AR QJ72LP25 25 Double loop MELSECNET 10 Network Remote I O net remote I O station System Reference Manual IB NA 66690 b Gl optical inte
103. Rotates the commanded rotation amount Inch mm changeover Not provided Command to match the feedback unit PLC axis automatic When zero point initialization to start up the absolute position detection initial set system uses the stopper method the automatic initial setting operation can be selected IH 218 17 Machine Support Functions 17 3 PLC Operation 17 3 5 PLC Axis Indexing M system A L system A PLC axis indexing is used to move the PLC axis to the positioning destination or an arbitrary coordinate position This function is applied to tool exchange and magazine control Positioning command methods 1 Station method The axis will be positioned to the destination station that has been decided There are two assigning methods Uniform assignment and arbitrary coordinate assignment Uniform assignment One rotation 360 of the rotary axis will be equally divided to determine the stations Maximum number of divisions 360 Station E Setting 8 stations 8 divisions For linear axis A valid stroke will be equally divided to determine the station Maximum number of divisions 359 Zero point valid stroke length Station 2 3 4 5 Station No Setting 5 stations Arbitrary coordinate assignment A station will be assigned to an arbitrary coordinate set in each table 2 Arbitrary coordinate designation method An arbitrary coordinate will be directly designated in PLC program for
104. S T and B commands in the same block are still executed as programmed 2 When the mode is switched during automatic operation to manual operation jog feed handle feed or incremental feed the feed hold stop mode is entered 3 An interrupt operation based on manual operation jog feed handle feed or incremental feed can be executed during feed hold Atomatic operation start Feed hold Axis movement state 11 3 8 Search amp Start M system O L system O If the Search Start signal is input when the memory mode is selected the designated machining program is searched and executed from the beginning If the search amp start signal has been input during automatic operation in the memory mode search amp start is executed after resetting The machining program No to be searched are designated by PLC program Il 94 11 Operation Support Functions 11 4 Interrupt Operation 11 4 Interrupt Operation 11 4 1 Manual Interruption M system O L system O Manual interrupt is a function that enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation The systems used to select the operation mode are as follows e System which initiates the interrupt by switching from the automatic mode to manual mode e System which initiates the interrupt by selecting the manual mode at the same time as the automatic mode Refer to 11 4 9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes Whether the manual interrup
105. SP 1 Spindle drive unit MDS DH SP Spindle drive unit MDS D SP2 2 Spindle drive unit MDS DH CV Power supply unit MDS D CV Power supply unit 200VAC 50Hz 200 to 230VAC 60Hz 380 to 440VAC 50Hz 380 to 480VAC 60Hz 1 0 15 10 MDS D2 V1 1 axis servo drive unit MDS DH2 V1 1 axis servo drive unit MDS D2 V2 2 axis servo drive unit MDS DH2 V2 _2 axis servo drive unit MDS D2 V3 3 axis servo drive unit MDS DH2 SP Spindle drive unit MDS D2 SP 1 spindle drive unit MDS DH2 CV Power supply unit MDS D2 SP2 2 spindle drive unit MDS D2 CV Power supply unit 2 Resistance regenerative type MDS D SVJ3 SPJ3 Series MDS DJ Series 200VAC 50Hz 200 to 230VAC 60Hz 200VAC 50Hz 200 to 230VAC 60Hz 1 0 15 1 0 15 MDS D SVJ3 1 axis servo drive unit MDS DJ V1 1 axis servo drive unit MDS D SPJ3 Spindle drive unit MDS DJ V2 2 axis servo drive unit MDS DJ SP 1 spindle drive unit MDS DJ SP2 2 spindle drive unit 3 Multi axis integrated regenerative type MDS DM Series MDS DM2 Series 200VAC 50Hz 200 to 230VAC 60Hz 200VAC 50Hz 200 to 230VAC 60Hz 1 0 15 1 0 15 MDS DM V3 3 axis integrated servo drive unit MDS DM2 SPV2 SPV3 SPHV3 Multi axis integrated MDS DM SPV2 SPV3 Multi axis integrated drive drive unit unit 62 4 CNC Signals PLC Interface Signals 4 CNC Signals PLC Interface Signals The CNC signal includes the following signals Refer to PLC Interface Manual for detail Bit Type Input Signals
106. Signal splitter Max 5m FCU7 HN887 SKIP Drive Units a TU VF am MPG TERMINAL cin 209 a 24VDC Not used i 12VDC Note 1 H300 a o MPG Max 20m 20 Y SKIP 2 MA Manual Lo signals 3 O Pulse lt Notes gt J 4 points l Generator a 24VDC i MPGH3 Prepared by user Manual O UFO 01 2Z9 5VDC Pulse o WY a Used with connector Generator Cable gt HD60C 12VDC Note 1 2ch G020 5VDC 1ch Max 15m l G021 5VDC 2ch Max 15m Note 1 HD60C 12VDC requires another power source12VDC G022 5VDC 3ch Max 15m FQ20 12VDC 1ch Max 45m F021 12VDC 2ch Max 45m FO22 12VDC 3ch Max 45m soon Cannot be used with cable H300 at the same time A gt bono n n o oeonoono nonnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnoos o 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 1 3 Component Modules 1 3 1 CNC Control Unit 1 Basic base Model mame mars O Reone Maintenance and inspection Q312DB 12 slots SH NA 080483ENG 2 Power supply Input power supply 100 to 240VAC Q61P Output power supply 5 DC Output current 6A Input power supply 24VDC Q63P Output power supply 5VDC Output current 6A QCPU User s Manual Input power supply 100 to 240VAC Hardware Design Q64PN Output power supply 5VDC Maintenance and Inspection Output current 8 5A SH NA 080483ENG Input power supply 100 to 120VAC 200 to 240VAC Q64P O
107. Speed loop gain Motor Differential Il 165 13 Machine Accuracy Compensation 13 1 Static Accuracy Compensation 13 Machine Accuracy Compensation 13 1 Static Accuracy Compensation 13 1 1 Backlash Compensation M system O L system O This function compensates for the error backlash produced when the direction of the machine system is reversed The backlash compensation can be set in the cutting feed mode or rapid traverse mode The amount of backlash compensation can be set separately for each axis It is set using a number of pulses in increments of one half of the least input unit The output follows the output unit system The output unit system is the unit system of the machine system ball screw unit system The amount of compensation for each axis ranges from 0 to 9999 pulses 13 1 2 Memory type Pitch Error Compensation M system A L system A Machine accuracy can be improved by compensating for the errors in the screw pitch intervals among the mechanical errors production errors wear etc of the feed screws The compensation positions and amounts are stored in the memory by setting them beforehand for each axis and this means that there is no need to attach dogs to the machine The compensation points are divided into the desired equal intervals 1 Division intervals of compensation points 1 to 9999999 um 2 Number of compensation points 1024 3 Compensation amount 128 to 127 output unit 4
108. System Command Jog mode Handle mode Incremental mode Manual arbitrary feed mode Reference position return mode Automatic initialization mode Program operation mode Memory mode FTP mode EDIT mode MDI mode Automatic operation start command Cycle start Automatic operation pause command Feed hold Single block Block start interlock Cutting block start interlock Dry run Error detect NC reset 1 NC reset 2 Reset 4 rewind Chamfering Automatic restart External search strobe M function finish 1 M function finish 2 Tool length measurement 1 Tool length measurement 2 L system synchronization correction mode Program restart Macro interrupt Rapid traverse Manual absolute Recalculation request Program display during operation Optional block skip 1 Reference position selection code Reference position selection code 2 Reference position selection method Optional block skip 2 65 Optional block skip 3 Optional block skip 4 Optional block skip 5 Optional block skip 6 Optional block skip 7 Optional block skip 8 Optional block skip 9 1st handle axis selection code 1 1st handle axis selection code 2 1st handle axis selection code 4 1st handle axis selection code 8 1st handle axis selection code 16 1st handle valid 2nd handle axis selection code 1 2nd handle axis selection code 2 2nd handle axis selection code 4 2nd handle axis selection code 8 2nd handle axis selection code 16 2nd handle valid 3rd handl
109. T commands can be issued even on the tool offset amount setting and display screen therefore at the manual tool length measurement the tools can be called successively to the spindle and measured very simply without having to change the screen page S command value Manual numerical value Sequence processing T command value M command value Note The input operation starts the execution of the M S or T command 11 4 8 MDI Interruption M system O L system O This function enables MDI programs to be executed during automatic operation in the single block stop status When the modal status is changed in the MDI program the modal status in the automatic operation mode is also changed II 99 11 Operation Support Functions 11 4 Interrupt Operation 11 4 9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes M system O L system O This function enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation by selecting an automatic operation mode MDI or memory and manual mode handle step jog or manual reference point return simultaneously Arbitrary feed based on the PLC is also possible Axis switching Automatic mode Automatic is J X axis Memory operation position e O control Q worl Axis control Simultaneous manual and a a 0 automatic operation O Y axis position 2 control 0 Jog o Manual O Ohandle operation 3 eS Z axis Manual mode Return Axis control 7 positio
110. The number of input points 64 points 16 points x 4 4 points of output for scan are used Cycle of dynamic scan 13 3ms Output method Direct output source output The number of output points 16 points 1point RUN Generic output signal Overload protection function Overheat protection function inside GT15 DIOR RUN output signal Overload protection function inside FCU7 HN831 Recovers automatically when overload or overheat is resolved LED display 24VINDC RUN output RUN 172 x 66 91 5 x 22 5 Outline dimension The figure inside brackets indicates the dimension to the tip of the connector Protection function 58 2 General Specifications 2 11 I O Extension Connector Unit Outline dimension and names of each parts 2 M4 screw 1 CNX1 Connector 3432 6002 LCPL 3M Cable side 7940 n000SC 3448 7940 59 2 General Specifications 2 CNX2 Connector 3432 6002 LCPL 3M Cable side 7940 n000SC 3448 7940 Name of the signal 3 CNY1 Connector 3429 5002 LCPL 3M Cable side 7926 0000SC 3448 7926 60 2 11 I O Extension Connector Unit 2 General Specifications 2 11 I O Extension Connector Unit 4 GOT DIO Connector PCS E50LMD HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO Cable side PCS ESOFA Name of the signal Pinnumber Name of the signal XDOE AS XDOF XDOC O a XDOD XDOA Oo 8B XDOB XD08 MA XDO09 XD06 a XDO7 XD04 o A XD05 XD02
111. Tool Offset Amat 9 3 1 Number of Tool OffsetSets_ SSCS 31240 Sets O 9314 200 8888 OO OOO A 9 3 2 1 Tool Shape Wear Offset Amount O 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 1 Machine Coordinate System O 10 1 2 Coordinate System Sting O 10 1 3 Automatic Coordinate System Seting o 10 1 4 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection 101 41 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection 6 sets G65410659 o 10 1 42 Extended Workpiece Coordinate System Selection 48 sets G541P110 P48 A 10 1 5 External Workpiece Coordinate Ost O 10 1 7 Local Coordinate System O 10 1 8 Coordinate System for Roays O 10 1 9 Plane Selection O 10 1 10 Origin SeyOngin Canal O O Cante Set O TT AN 10 2 1 Manual Reference Poston Reta O 10 2 2 Automatic 1st Reference Position Roum O 10 2 3 6nd 3rd ath Reference Position Retama O 10 2 4 Reference Position Check SSS 10 2 5 Absolute Position Detection A 11 Operation Support Functions SCS SCSCSC CSC Cd it ProgramControl SSS TT Optional Boksi O O O o 11 1 2 Optional Block Skip Addon o Cois SngebBok O 7112 Program Test A E 112 2 Machine LO 11 2 3 Miscellaneous Function La OO 7113 Program SearchiStariStop_____ SSSSSSCSCS SSS sA Program Search SSS 11 3 2 Sequence Number Seran O 11 3 Program Restart A 11 3 5 Automatic Operation SAO A A TT AN 11 3 8 Sere 8 SO
112. Tools o e e 17 7 3 EZSocket F Needto purchase separate SW O ___Oo_ 17 7 4 APLC Release Need to purchase separate SW ________________ ___A___ ___A IA E e 17 8 2 Cnc Remote Operation Tool oS S e 17 8 2 101 Remote Monitor Tool SS S O e O 17 8 3 Automatic Operation Lock A A 20 E 221 222 _ 24 25 226 226 17 6 4 PROFIBUS DP Master o A MEisEC A MELSEC 226 17 6 5 DeviceNet Master ___________________________ _ A MEisEC A MELSEC 226 226 226 226 226 i 287 227 227 287 227 27 05 05 06 07 08 17 220 221 222 224 225 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 227 227 227 227 227 227 27 I GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 System Basic Configuration Drawing 1 System Configuration 1 System Configuration 1 1 System Basic Configuration Drawing HMI GOT GT Works3 MITSUBISHI CNC C70 yy 07050 mmm 00 000 21 0 Memory card Fry Ca ie ee OA cl Jos HEB K ho Bonne s A Pome oe mA vonf wend wna i E _ i ia EA L SKIP CNC UNIT z w Cs E 3 A 2 comm PO A ft Ea I Battery MANUAL PLG dl UNIT A A E GX Works2 GX Developer NC Configurator2 NC Analyzer E heed N gt 7 v CNC Dr 1 System Configuration 1 2 General Connection D
113. U IA O PA A bese art ain eed eae anos oan oatmeal ee paulo 36 20 ONG CRU Modules toc alasdatuaed aae a RE 44 2 6 Battery Box tor CNG GRU MOI73NCCPU use neuer petetea dosed a 48 2 7 Dal Sigal MOS tedio dente i 49 216 SIGMal SPICE aaa a daba 53 2 9 Manual Pulse Generator cccceecccccceeeeeeceecaeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeeceeeeaeaeeeeeessaeeeeeeessaeseeeesseaaeeeeessaaeeeessssaaeeeees 55 2 10 Terminal Block for Dual Signal Module RecoMMended ccccooccncccoccnccccccnnccnnncncononcnncnnnnononnonncononnnnnncnnas 57 2 11 I O Extension Connector Unit ooooccnnccccccccnncccnnnncnncnononcnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnnnonanens 58 Seno ODINGIS DAVE ys tia ts ira oie lees coi 62 4 CNC Signals PLC Interface Signals o ccccccocnnccnncccooncnnncnnnanonnnnonnnncnnonononnnnnnnonnnnnrnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnnanennnnss 63 II FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS C70 Series Specifications List Standerd A Option O Selection C70 Series Class 1 Control Axes a 1 1 Control Axes 1 1 2 Max Number of Axes NC axes Spindles PLC axes 16 AN a o 6 11 2 3 Max Number of PLC axes S S 8 11 4 Max Number of PLC Indexing Axes S S 8 11 6 Max Number of NC AxesinaPartSystem 8 1 2 Control Part System 1 3 Control Axes and OperationModes 1 3 102 High Speed Program Server Mode 2 Input Command 2 1 1 2 Least Command Increment 0 1uM 2 2 Unit System 2 3 Program format 2 3 1 Program format 2 3
114. Voltage current input module Q64AD Q64AD GH 4 channels Input 10 to 10VDC 0 to 20mADC Output resolution O to 4000 4000 to 4000 O to 12000 12000 to 12000 O to 16000 16000 to 16000 Conversion speed 80us channel 18 point terminal block 4 channels Input 10 to 10VDC 0 to 20mADC Output resolution O to 32000 32000 to 32000 O to 64000 64000 to 64000 Conversion speed 10ms 4channels 18 point terminal block Channels are isolated Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual SH NA 080277 Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual SH NA 080055 Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual SH NA 080055 Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual SH NA 080277 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 8 Output module a Relay 16 points 24VDC 240VAC 2A point 8A common QY10 Response time 12ms 16 points common oN 18 point terminal block I O module Type Building Block User s Manual QY18A Response time 12ms 18 point terminal block All relays isolated b Triac 16 points 100 to 240VAC Minimum load voltage Current 24VAC 100mA 100 240VAC 25mA OFF time leakage current
115. When all machining programs are to be erased the programs are classified with their No into B 8000 to 8999 C 9000 to 9999 and A all others Program filing a This function displays a list of the machining programs stored registered in the controller memory b The programs are displayed in ascending order c Comments can be added to corresponding program numbers Program copying a Machining programs stored in the controller memory can be copied condensed or merged b The program No of the machining programs in the memory can be changed Program editing a Overwriting inserting and erasing can be done per character Il 43 5 Program Memory Editing 5 2 Editing 5 2 2 Background Editing M system O L system O This function enables one machining program to be created or editing while another program is run Prohibited Program registered in memory 01000 02000 Memory O3000 operation 04000 Program editing Machining with memory operation 1 The data of the machining programs being used in memory operation can be displayed and scrolled on the setting and display unit but data cannot be added revised or deleted 2 The editing functions mentioned in the preceding section can be used at any time for machining programs which are not being used for memory operation This makes it possible to prepare and edit the next program for machining and so the machining preparations can be
116. Whether interpolation or non interpolation is to apply to the movement can be selected using a parameter Il 88 10 Coordinate System 10 2 Return 10 2 5 Absolute Position Detection M system A L system A The absolute position detection function holds the relation of the actual machine position and the machine coordinates in the controller with a battery even when the power is turned OFF When the power is turned ON again automatic operation can be started without executing reference point return High speed return will always be used for the reference point return command For the absolute position detection method there are two method such as the dog type and dog less type according to how the zero point is established Establishment of Adjustment of zero zero point point position HA type Machine end stopper method Automatic Method Marked point alignment method Method II Dog type The zero point is established by manually pressing the machine against a set point on the machine The zero point is established by automatically pressing the machine against a set point on the machine The zero point is established by aligning with a marked point on the machine It is established after aligning with a marked point and then returning to the grid point The zero point is established by aligning with a marked point on the machine It is established after aligning with a marked point and but
117. Zz1 Command axes The coordinate word indicates the axes for which the mirror image function is to be canceled and the coordinates are ignored In the case of G51 1 Xx1 S Shape achieved when Original shape program machining program for the left side has been executed after the mirror command Mirroring axis Il 134 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 4 4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts M system L system A With machines in which the base tool post and facing tool post are integrated this function enables the programs prepared for cutting at the base side to be executed by the tools on the facing side The distance between the two posts is set beforehand with the parameter The command format is given below When the G68 command is issued the subsequent program coordinate systems are shifted to the facing side and the movement direction of the X axis is made the opposite of that commanded by the program When the G69 command is issued the subsequent program coordinate systems are returned to the base side The facing tool post mirror image function can be set to ON or OFF automatically by means of T tool commands without assigning the G68 command A parameter is used to set ON or OFF for the facing tool post mirror image function corresponding to the T commands Base post Programmed path Parameter for distance between posts radial value X axis on
118. achine position If the machine s displacement value caused by heat is input for example this can be used for thermal displacement compensation Machine coordinate zero point when the external machine coordinate system offset amount is 0 Mc Compensation vector according to external machine coordinate system compensation Machine coordinate zero point Il 167 13 Machine Accuracy Compensation 13 1 Static Accuracy Compensation 13 1 5 Circular Error Radius Compensation M system A L system A With commands designated during arc cutting this function compensates for movement toward the inside of the arcs caused by a factor such as servo delay 13 1 6 Ball Screw Thermal Expansion Compensation M system A L system A 1 Outline The feed error caused by the thermal expansion of the ball screw is set from the PLC and compensated The compensation amount depends on the offset compensation amount and maximum compensation amount The compensation amount based on the offset compensation amount is set as the maximum compensation amount The offset compensation amount and maximum compensation amount are set beforehand in the parameters Compensation amount Compensation line amount at pean coordinate X Offset compensation Zero point Ball screw X Machine coordinates Thermal expansion Offset compensation compensation valid range Maximum compensation position position Parameter Parameter 2 Compensation o
119. achine s tool nose and the program coordinate position made by the tool length and to enhance both the programming and operational efficiency 1 M system G43 Zz1 Hh1 Tool length offset can be provided not G44 Zz1 Hh1 only for the Z axis but for all other axes Offset Offset axis Offset No which can be controlled in the system X direction Y etc G49 y Tool length offset cancel The offset direction is determined by the G command G43 Forward direction z1 h1 G44 Reverse direction z1 h1 Offset can be canceled by the following G commands G49 Note 1 When the tool length offset axis is returned to the reference G43 HO point the offset of that axis is canceled G44 HO Example Example of tool length offset using a combination with tool length measurement type XO YO Z0 MO6 G00 G43 HO1 Note The tool length offset sapa amount is set as a 450 000 negative value such we H01 450 000 Tabe Ad Table a Yj Ye 4 a TR Z 0 0 Il 64 9 Tool Compensation 9 1 Tool Length Tool Position 2 L system a Shape offset Tool length is offset in reference to the programmed base position The programmed base position is usually the center of the tool rest or the nose position of the base tool The programmed base position is the center The programmed base position is the nose of the tool rest of the base tool Base position base point o eio I
120. al Absolute Switch M system O L system O The program absolute positions are updated by an amount equivalent to the distance by which the tool is moved by hand when the manual absolute switch signal is turned ON In other words the coordinate system based on the original program will not shift even if the tool machine is moved by hand Thus if automatic operation is started in this case the tool will return to the path before manual movement X Programmed path Feed hold stop absolute command Manual interrupt 2 Program absolute position is updated by an amount equivalent to traveled value Path after manual interrupt Tool passes along same path as that programmed With manual absolute signal ON Programmed path absolute command a Manual interrupt Program absolute position is not updated even if axis moves Path after manual interrupt Path is shifted by an amount equivalent to manual interrupt value Zero point moves With manual absolute signal OFF Il 96 11 Operation Support Functions 11 4 Interrupt Operation 11 4 4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract M system L system A This function enables to interrupt machining process without damaging a thread ridge when a feed hold signal has been input during thread cutting process in a thread cutting cycle If a feed hold signal is input during chamfering or thread cutting without chamfering operation stops at the position w
121. alent to the designated amount incremental value in the axis direction each time the jog switch is pressed The incremental feed amount is the amount obtained by multiplying the least input increment that was set with the parameter by the incremental feed magnification rate The incremental feed amount parameter and its magnification rate are common to all part systems Incremental Scale factor VD E X Y Machine tool sx ls D ap a Step feed 4 6 4 Handle Feed M system A L system A 1 axis In the handle feed mode the machine can be moved in very small amounts by rotating the manual pulse generator The scale can be selected from X1 X10 X100 X1000 or arbitrary value Note 1 The actual movement amount and scale may not match if the manual pulse generator is rotated quickly 3 axes In the handle feed mode individual axes can be moved in very small amounts either separately or simultaneously by rotating the manual pulse generators installed on each of the axes Note 1 The actual movement amount and scale may not match if the manual pulse generator is rotated quickly Il 40 4 Feed 4 7 Dwell 4 7 Dwell 4 7 1 Dwell Time based Designation M system O L system O The G04 command temporarily stops machine movement and sets the machine stand by status for the time designated in the program 1 M system or G04 Ppi Dwell Dwell time The time based dwell can be designated in the range f
122. and mode M code independent output MOO M code independent output MO1 M code independent output M02 M code independent output M30 M function strobe 1 M function strobe 2 M function strobe 3 M function strobe 4 Manual numerical command Tool change position return completion New tool change T function strobe 1 2nd M function strobe 1 S function strobe 1 S function strobe 2 S function strobe 3 S function strobe 4 S function strobe 5 S function strobe 6 S function strobe 7 Position switch 1 Position switch 2 Position switch 3 Position switch 4 Position switch 5 4 CNC Signals PLC Interface Signals Position switch 6 Position switch 7 Position switch 8 Waiting for data to be downloaded Tap retract possible No of work machining over Power shutoff movement over Position switch 9 Position switch 10 Position switch 11 Position switch 12 Position switch 13 Position switch 14 Position switch 15 Position switch 16 Spindle State S command gear No illegal S command max min command value over S command no gear selected Spindle speed upper limit over Spindle speed lower limit over Spindle gear shift command 1 Spindle gear shift command 2 Current detection Speed detection In spindle alarm Zero speed Spindle up to speed Spindle in position In L coil selection Spindle ready ON Spindle servo ON In spindle forward run In spindle reverse run Z phase passed Position loop in position In spind
123. and block stop 3007 Changing the validity valid or invalid of mirror image 3011 3012 Reading and writing of current date and time 3901 3902 Reading and writing of the number of the workpiece machining and the maximum number of workpiece machining 4001 to 4021 4101 to 4130 Reading of G command 4201 to 4221 4301 to 4330 modal and other modal information 5001 to 5141 Reading information of various positions Il 106 ATAR ESAS eo Oe Ss AR ARS AA ea no o PS Ss no A 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions Number inside the brackets indicate No of Type i variable sets cont 5201 to 532n Reading and writing of workpiece coordinate system offset data 30060 to 30068 Reading the coordinate rotation parameter 31001 to 31023 Reading and writing of a rotation axis configuration parameter 31100 31101 Reading the number of available blocks for reverse run and the counter of available blocks for reverse run 50000 to 51199 Reading and writing of the data between NC machining program and PLC program 60000 to 64700 Reading and writing of the tool life management data Fixed cycle variables 1 to 32 32 Local variables in a fixed cycle program Note 1 All common variables are held even when the power is turned OFF Note 2 The common variables can be emptied by resetting or turning the power OFF when the para
124. art system also functions as the above single block in each independent part system Single block SBK A Automatic operation start ST E a aes NN W cost Saa G01 X1000 G01 Z100 G01 Z1000 4 4 4 SBK ON at start SBK change SBK ON after INVALID during movement block completion VALID VALID Movement block Il 91 11 Operation Support Functions 11 2 Program Test 11 2 Program Test 11 2 1 Dry Run M system O L system O F code feed commands for automatic operation can be switched to the manual feed rate data of the machine operation board by turning ON the dry run input signal Dry run switch ON Command Rapid traverse Rapid traverse selector switch OFF selector switch ON G00 G27 G28 G29 G30 G60 Manual feed rate Note 1 G01 G02 G03 Manual feed rate Cutting clamp speed Note 1 The dry run should be valid by the parameter setting 11 2 2 Machine Lock M system O L system O When the machine lock input signal is set to ON the NC operations can be executed without actually moving the NC axis The command speed is the feed rate during machine lock Cutting override and rapid traverse override are valid The M S T and B commands are executed as usual and so machine lock is completed by returning the FIN signal 1 Reference point return manual G28 G29 G30 is controlled as far as the interim point in the machine lock status but when the interim point is reached the counter is move
125. at the corner by the following command during tool radius compensation G39 Xx1 Yyl1 Xx1 Yy1 Movement amount Tool center path Arc inserted at corner Programmed path P d N A The compensation vector can be changed in following two ways G38 Xx1 Yy1 Xx1 Yy1 Movement amount The tool radius compensation vector amount and direction are retained G38 Xx1 Yy1 lit Jji Dd1 Xx1 Yy1 Movement amount lid Jj1 Compensation vector direction Dd1 Compensation vector length The tool radius compensation vector direction is updated by and J Tool center path AA Holding of previous intersection point vector Vector with length D 114 j14 LON NAGOIXx11 Ho N12G38Xx12Yy12 4 N13G38Xx13Yy13 Ni Intersection point vector N15G40Xx15Yy15 e lt NM N14G38Xx14li14Jj14Dd14 Nit The tool radius compensation is canceled by the following command G40 Xx1 Yy1 lid Jjl Xx1 Yy1 Movement amount 111 Jj1 Compensation vector direction The vector prior to canceling is prepared by calculating the intersection point with the and J direction When i and j commands are assigned to G40 q N11G01Xx11 PL N12Xx12Yy12 E N13Xx13Yy13 gt N14G40Xx141114Jj14 114 314 Il 68 9 Tool Compensation 9 2 Tool Radius 9 2 3 Tool Nose Radius Compensation G40 G41 G42 M system L system O Corresponding to the tool No the tool nose is assumed to be a half circle of radius R and com
126. ation 1 3 Component Modules 11 Temperature input module a RTD 4 channels Platinum RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 Q64RD 1983 JPt100 JISC 1604 1981 Conversion speed 40ms channel 18 point terminal block RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module 4 channels User s Manual Platinum RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 SH NA 080142 1983 JPt100 JISC 1604 1981 Ni100 Q DIN43760 Q64RD G 1987 Conversion speed 40ms channel 18 point terminal block Channels are isolated b Thermocouple 4 channels Thermocouple JIS C1602 1995 Conversion speed 40ms channel Thermocouple Input Module 18 point terminal block Channel Isolated 4 channels Thermocouple JIS C1602 1995 Thermocouple Micro Voltage Q64TDV GH Micro voltage input range 100mV to 100mV Input Module User s Manual Conversion speed sampling period x 3 channel SH NA 080141 18 point terminal block 4 channels Thermocouple K J T B S E R N U L PLII W5Re W26Re Q64TCTT Without heater disconnection detection Sampling period 0 5s 4channels 18 point terminal block Temperature Control Module User s Manual 4 channels Thermocouple K J T B S E R N U SH NA 080121 L PLII W5Re W26Re Q64TCTTBW With heater disconnection detection Sampling period 0 5s 4channels 2 units of 18 point terminal block c Platinum RTD 4 channels Platinum RTD Pt100 JPt100 Q64TCRT Without heater eee me en detection Sampling period 0 5s 4channels 18 p
127. ation Program Fundamentals SH 080807 ENG The power on time ratio indicates the ratio of PLC power on time to one day 24 hours When the total power on time is 12 hours and the total power off time is 12 hours the power on time ratio is 50 The guaranteed value equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the characteristics value of the memory SRAM supplied by the manufacturer and under the storage ambient temperature range of 25 to 75 operating ambient temperature of O to 55 The actual service value equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the measured value and under the storage ambient temperature of 40 This value is intended for reference only as it varies with characteristics of the memory 42 2 General Specifications 2 4 PLC CPU 5 In the following status the backup time after power OFF is 3 minutes The battery connector is disconnected The lead wire of the battery is broken 6 Ethernet Ethernet connector 43 2 General Specifications 2 5 CNC CPU Module 2 5 CNC CPU Module Dimension and Names of parts mm A Q173NOCPU lt 1 2 3 gt 4 5 gt 6 n O 7 gt 13 119 3 12 AT al gt 2 2 a A im DEA 8 9 10 11 1 LED
128. ation will result for a cylinder which is inclined as shown in the figure on the right In other words linear interpolation of the Z and V axes is carried out in synchronization with the circular interpolation on the XY plane Il 16 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation 3 2 5 Cylindrical Interpolation M system A L system A This function transfers a shape on the cylinder s side the shape yielded by the cylindrical coordinate system onto the plane surface When the transferred shape is designated in the form of plane coordinates in the program the shape is converted into a movement along the linear and rotary axes of the original cylinder coordinates and the contours are controlled by the means of the CNC unit during machining Since the programming can be performed for the shapes produced by transferring the side surfaces of the cylinders this function is useful for the machining of cylindrical cam and other such parts The following figures show that different axes should be commanded between the lathe system and the machining center system The program is commanded to the rotary axis and the orthogonal axis for machining a groove etc on the cylinder s side surface X Hypothetical EA Z 1 Cylindrical interpolation mode start Format G07 1 Name of rotary axis Cylinder radius value Cylindrical interpolation is performed between the rotary axis designated in the G07 1 block or the G107 blo
129. axis and it is expressed as follows LAS LD ADA AM di 2 The X axis inclined axis speed is as follows Fa Fp cos Xa Za and Fa are the actual movement amounts and speed Xp Zp and Fp are the movement amounts and speed on the program coordinates I 213 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction 17 2 5 Position Switch M system O 24 for each part system L system O 24 for each part system 16 for PLC axis 16 for PLC axis Instead of a dog switch on a machine s axis a hypothetical dog switch is established using a parameter to set a coordinate position to show the axis name and the hypothetical dog position When the machine reaches the position a signal is output to the PLC interface The hypothetical dog switches are known as position switches PSW The coordinate position indicating the hypothetical dog positions dog1 dog2 on the coordinate axes whose names were set by parameters ahead of time in place of the dog switches provided on the machine axes are set using position switches PSW1 to PSW16 When the machine has reached the hypothetical dog positions a signal is output to the device supported by the PLC interface Example of dog1 dog2 settings and execution dog1 dog2 Bp as dog1 lt dog2 dog dog2 Signal is output between dog1 oS and dog2 Basic machine coordinate system zero point Hypothetical dog dog PSW width dog1 gt dog2 pl E dog Signal is o
130. bel address 9000 to be invalidated for the program display in the monitor screen etc The operation search of a target program can also be invalidated The validity of the display is selected with the parameters The setting will be handled as follows according to the value 0 Display and search are possible 1 Display of the program details is prohibited 2 Display and operation search of the program details are prohibited The program details are not displayed in the prohibited state but the program number and sequence number will be displayed Il 194 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 13 Safety Observation M system A L system A This function is composed of the following functions Dual safety circuit function PLC CPU and CNC CPU separately control the Input Output signal of the dual signal unit The state of the disagreement of the Input Output signal of each CPU is observed by the dual signal comparison When an error is detected during observation the main power for the drive is shut Dual emergency stop function PLC CPU CNC CPU and drive CPU separately observe the input of emergency stop The main power for the drive can be shut by controlling the contactor from PLC CNC CPU and drive CPU respectively when the emergency stops Dual speed monitor function CNC CPU and drive CPU separately observe the following e Observe the open and close state signal of the safety door detected with a di
131. built in flash memory 9MB 12 1 type SVGA 800x600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1585V STBD wide angle view 65536 colors lt Video RGB supported gt GT15 General Description 24VDC built in flash memory 9MB IB NA 0800322E 12 1 type SVGA 800x600 dots GT1585 STBA TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view 65536 colors 100 240VAC built in flash memory 9MB 12 1 type SVGA 800x600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC built in flash memory 9MB GT1585 STBD c GT1575 10 4 type SVGA 800x600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1575V STBA wide angle view 65536 colors lt Video RGB supported gt 100 240VAC built in flash memory 9MB 10 4 type SVGA 800x600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1575V STBD wide angle view 65536 colors lt Video RGB supported gt GT15 General Description 24VDC built in flash memory 9MB IB NA 0800322E 10 4 type SVGA 800x600 dots GT1575 STBA TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view 65536 colors 100 240VAC built in flash memory 9MB 10 4 type SVGA 800x600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC built in flash memory 9MB GT1575 STBD 26 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 2 Communication unit a Ether
132. by using drive unit communication over the high speed optical servo network By minimizing the synchronization error in this way the accuracy of the synchronous tapping is increased Implement to increase the accuracy of 0 the synchronous 1000 b A AAEE AANA AERE tappi ng 2000 Synchronization ES eed eens MDS D DH Series with DMR DD control Conventional without OMR DD control Il 38 4 Feed 4 6 Manual Feed 4 6 Manual Feed 4 6 1 Manual Rapid Traverse M system O L system O When the manual rapid traverse mode is selected the tool can be moved at the rapid traverse rate for each axis separately Override can also be applied to the rapid traverse rate by means of the rapid traverse override function Rapid traverse override is common to all part systems Rapid traverse Rapid traverse override x25 x50 dp x1 D a Machine tool gt Rapid traverse 4 6 2 Jog Feed M system O L system O When the jog feed mode is selected the tool can be moved in the axis direction or in which the machine is to be moved at the per minute feedrate The jog feed rate is common to all part systems Feed rate Override O Q 2 Machine tool 3000 200 sx ls ax Ll X D D M M Manual cutting feed Il 39 4 Feed 4 6 Manual Feed 4 6 3 Incremental Feed M system O L system O When the incremental feed mode is selected the tool can be operated by an amount equiv
133. ch is an open equipment must be installed within a sealed metal control panel IP54 or higher C70 must also be used and stored under the conditions listed in the table of specifications below Specification ambient 0 to 55 C Temperature 32 to 131 F 25 to 75 C Storage ambient Temperature 13 to 167 F Operating ambient Humidity Operating ambient Humidity Humidity 5 to oe non condensing Storage ambient Humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing Under intermittent 10 to 57Hz ee 0 075mm 10 times each in Vibration resistance vibration s7to160Hz 98mis Xyz Under continuous 10 to 57 Hz 0 035mm crections For 80 min No corrosive gases nor inflammable gases 2000m 6561 68ft or less Note 3 Inside control panel Pollution level Note 2 2 or less Note 1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category Il applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V Note 2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used Pollution level 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally N
134. chining program Opm Interrupt program Opi The user macro interrupt signal is accepted during this period Interrupt signal The user macro interrupt signal is not accepted during this period The modal information is restored to the status applying before interrupt Il 105 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 2 4 Variable Command Programming can be given flexible and general purpose capabilities by designating variables instead of directly assigning numbers for addresses in programs and by supplying the values of those variables as required when running the programs Arithmetic operations adding subtracting multiplying and dividing can also be conducted for the variables Number of variable sets specifications The numbers of common variable sets depend on the options and are as follows gt Mee e variable sets Common variables Can be used commonly For 1 part GA ee e G ete acid E Uabenel pani For multi part di a 600 sets D 500to999 500 Local variables 1 to 33 33 Can be used as local variable in macro program System variables 1000 to 1395 Macro interface input output 2000 to 2800 Read and write of tool 10000 to 18000 compensation data 3000 3001 3002 Integrated time 3003 Changing the validity valid or invalid of single block miscellaneous function 3004 Changing the validity valid or invalid of feed hold 3006 Message display
135. ck and any other linear axis G07 1 and G107 have the same movement 2 Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel Format G07 1 Name of rotary axis 0 If the name of the rotary axis is C the cylindrical interpolation cancel mode is established with the command below G07 1 CO Il 17 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation 3 2 6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation M system A L system A This function converts the commands programmed by the orthogonal coordinate axes into linear axis movements tool movements and rotary axis movements workpiece rotation to control the contours It is useful for cutting linear cutouts on the outside diameter of the workpiece grinding cam shafts etc a Hypothetical axis b Polar coordinate interpolation plane G17 plane a 1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode G12 1 The polar coordinate interpolation mode is established by designating the G12 1 command Polar coordinate interpolation plane consists of a linear axis and a hypothetical axis which are at right angles to each other Polar coordinate interpolation is performed on this plane a Linear interpolation and circular interpolation can be designated in the polar coordinate interpolation mode b Either absolute command or incremental command can be issued c Tool radius compensation can be applied to the program commands Polar coordinate interpolation is performed for the path after tool radius co
136. ck control The state will approach the semi closed loop system as the primary delay filter s time constant increases so the position loop gain limit will increase Note that the limit of the position loop gain increased with the dual feedback function is the same as the position loop gain limit for a semi closed system that does not use a machine side detector scale etc In addition the positioning time will increase as the primary delay filter time constant increases 13 2 3 Lost Motion Compensation M system O L system O This function compensates the error in protrusion shapes caused by lost motion at the arc quadrant changeover section during circular cutting Il 170 14 Automation Support Functions 14 1 Measurement 14 Automation Support Functions 14 1 Measurement 14 1 1 Skip 14 1 1 1 Skip M system A L system A When the external skip signal is input during linear interpolation using the G31 command the machine feed is stopped immediately the remaining distance is discarded and the commands in the next block are executed G31 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ffi G31 Measurement command Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Command values Ff Feed rate Skip signal input Feed rate Programmed end point Remaining Position Actual movement distance distance When the G31 command is issued acceleration deceleration is accomplished in steps time constant 0 There are two types of skip feed rate 1 Feed rate based on program command wh
137. control and is updated according to the amount moved during spindle control when the C axis servo READY is turned ON The C axis position at servo ON may differ from the position just before the previous servo OFF Il 57 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 8 Spindle Synchronization In a machine with two or more spindles this function controls the rotation soeed and phase of one selected spindle synchronized spindle in synchronization with the rotation of the other selected spindle basic spindle There are two methods for giving commands G code and PLC It is used in cases where for instance workpiece clamped to the basic spindle is to be clamped to the synchronized spindle instead or where the spindle rotation speed is to be changed while one workpiece remains clamped to both spindles 8 1 8 1 Spindle Synchronization M system A L system A The synchronous spindle is designated and the start end of the synchronization are commanded with the G command in the machining program Command format Spindle synchronization control cancel G113 This command releases the state of synchronization between two spindles whose rotation has been synchronized by the spindle synchronization command Spindle synchronization control ON G114 1 This command is used to designate the basic spindle and the spindle to be synchronized with the basic spindle and it places the two designated spindles in th
138. coordinates of the barrier points as shown below P1 gt P2 gt P3 P4 gt P5 gt P6 However this need not apply to the Z axis coordinates Il 190 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 5 Interlock M system O L system O The machine movement will decelerate and stop as soon as the interlock signal serving as the external input is turned ON When the interlock signal is turned OFF the machine starts moving again 1 Inthe manual mode only that axis for which the interlock signal is input will stop 2 Inthe automatic mode all axes will stop when the interlock signal is input to even one axis which coincides with the moving axis 3 Block start interlock While the block start interlock signal BSL is OFF valid the execution of the next block during automatic operation will not be started The block whose execution has already commenced is executed until its end Automatic operation is not suspended The commands in the next block are placed on standby and their execution is started as soon as the signal is turned ON Note 1 This signal is valid for all blocks including internal operation blocks such as fixed cycles 4 Cutting start interlock While the cutting start interlock signal CSL is OFF valid the execution of all movement command blocks except positioning during automatic operation will not be started The block whose execution has already commenced is executed until its end Automatic
139. cremental axis name is registered in the parameter However the arc radius designation R and arc center designation I J K always use incremental designations Absolute command absolute value command X Z Incremental command incremental value command U W Example G00 X100 W200 Absolute value Incremental value Incremental value command Absolute value command G00 U ul W wt GOO Xx1 Zz1l Current position X X Current position End point End point The above drawing shows the case The above drawing shows the case for the diameter command for the diameter command Note 1 In addition to the above command method using the above axis addresses the absolute value command and incremental value command can be switched by commanding the G code G90 G91 Select with the parameters Il 8 2 Input Command 2 4 Command Value 2 4 3 Diameter Radius Designation M system L system O For the axis command value the radius designation or diameter designation can be changed with parameters When the diameter designation is selected the scale of the length of the selected axis is doubled Only half 1 2 of the commanded amount moves This function is used when programming the workpiece dimensions on a lathe as diameters Changing over from the diameter designation to the radius designation or vice versa can be set separately for each axis Spindle Workpiece coordinate Zero point When the tool i
140. ct to fatalities AN DANGER or serious injuries if handling is mistaken When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if AN WARNING handling is mistaken When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical damage AN CAUTION could occur if handling is mistaken Note that even items ranked as F CAUTION may lead to major results depending on the situation In any case important information that must always be observed is described The meanings of the pictorial signs are given below The following signs indicate prohibition and compulsory This sign indicates prohibited behavior must not do For example VZ indicates Keep fire away This sign indicated a thing that is pompously must do For example indicates it must be grounded The meaning of each pictorial sign is as follows A CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION Danger Danger rotated object HOT Electric shock explosive risk Prohibited Disassembly is KEEP FIRE General Earth ground prohibited AWAY instruction Not applicable in this manual Not applicable in this manual 1 Items related to product and manual A The items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as not possible This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added AN Some functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on the NC system software version 2 Items related to start up and mai
141. d have been assigned in the same block then the movement command signal can be used as a sync signal for either executing the processing of the M S T or B command at the same time as the command or executing it upon completion of the movement command II 223 17 Machine Support Functions 17 4 PLC Interface 17 4 3 PLC Window M system A L system A PLC window is used to read write the operation state axis information parameters and tool data of the CNC through a cyclic trans mission area in the CPU shared memory In the interface between CNC CPU for PLC window and PLC CPU Read control command Read data and Read result are all called Read window Write control commana Write data and Write result are all called Write window These windows are used for the read and write operations 40 units of windows 20 units for each are provided for Read window and Write window Outlines of read and write processes are shown below lt Read process gt lt Read window gt Parameters Tool data R os Read result Max 20 windows 1 PLC sets the Read control command with the information on the CNC internal data to be read and then turn the read control signal ON 2 CNC receives the control signal and reads the data designated in the Read control commana 3 CNC sets the read data to Read data CNC also sets the read status and results such as errors to the Read result lt Write process gt
142. d in the positive direction as seen from the starting point and when it is negative they are provided in the negative direction Pnx Number of holes nx in the X axis direction any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned JAy Y axis interval Ay it is based on the least input increment when Ay is positive the intervals are provided in the positive direction as seen from the starting point and when it is negative they are provided in the negative direction Kny Number of holes ny in the Y axis direction any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned Example With 0 001 mm least input increment G91 G81 Z 10 000 R5 000 F20 G37 1 X300 000 Y 100 000 150 000 P10 J100 000 K8 Position prior to execution of G37 1 command x1 300mm nx 10 holes Il 119 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 3 4 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining M system L system O The shape normally programmed in several blocks for rough cutting etc in the turning machining can be commanded in one block This function is useful for machining program simplification The fixed cycles are as follows G77 Longitudinal cutting cycle G78 Thread cutting cycle G79 Face cutting cycle Format GAA XU_Z W K REF G18 plane Each fixed cycle command for turning machining is a modal G code and is effective until another command of the same modal group or a
143. d to the zero point and the block is completed 2 Machine lock is effective in the signal status applying when the axis has stopped 3 Block stop will be applied if the machine lock signal is turned ON and OFF or OFF and ON during automatic operation 4 On PLC programming the signal for machine lock has for automatic operation and manual operation of each axis Normally all signals are simultaneously turned ON and OFF However when Z axis cancellation function is executed the machine lock signal for Z axis is turned ON and OFF 11 2 3 Miscellaneous Function Lock M system O L system O The M S T and B 2nd miscellaneous function output signals are not output to the machine or PLC when the miscellaneous function lock signal of external input is turned ON This function can be used when checking only the movement commands in a program check The start signals of the M command are output for the MOO M01 MO2 and M30 commands and so a completion signal must be returned 1 Fixed cycle spindle functions containing an S code and any M S T or B function assigned by a manual numerical command or in automatic operation will not be executed The code data and strobe MF SF TF BF outputs are stopped 2 If this signal is set ON after the code data has already been output the output is executed as it would normally be executed until the end until FIN1 or FIN2 is received and the strobe is turned OFF 3 Even when this signal is
144. d with an S code For the metric designation the speed is commanded with an m min unit and for the inch designation the speed is commanded with a feet min unit In the constant surface speed cancel mode the S code is a spindle rotation speed command The axis for which constant surface speed is controlled is generally the X axis However this can be changed with the parameter settings or with address P in the G96 block Note 1 If there is only one spindle the spindle will not operate normally if the constant surface speed control command S command or spindle related M command is commanded randomly from each part system These commands must be commanded from only one certain part system or commanded simultaneously with standby The controller will execute the following control for the constant surface speed control and S commands The part system from which an S command was issued last will have the spindle control rights That part system will judge whether the constant surface soeed command mode is valid or canceled and will execute spindle control Part system 1 program G97 S1000 S2000 G96 S200 Part system 2 program G96 S100 Spindle speed S200 m min 1000 r min S2000 r min S100 m min Spindle control rights Part system 1 Part system 2 Part system 1 Il 54 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 4 Spindle Override M system O L system O This function applies override t
145. d within the machine tool builder macros These variables can be used commonly within the machine tool builder macro programs Call format G Argument edil G code defined in macro definition program Argument Argument is used when a local variable must be delivered to the macro program Designate a real value after the address Note If the macro parameter and the macro definition program share a G code the macro parameter definition will have the priority Il 104 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 2 3 Macro Interruption M system A L system A By inputting a user macro interrupt signal from the PLC the program being currently executed is interrupted and other programs can be called instead Retract or return operations when tools have been damaged for instance and other kinds of restoration operations to be conducted when trouble has occurred are programmed in the interrupt programs There are two types of interrupts type 1 and type 2 as described below and they are selected using a parameter Interrupt type 1 The block being executed is immediately interrupted and the interrupt program is run immediately Interrupt type 2 After the block being executed is complete the interrupt program is executed The command format is given below M96 P_ H_ User macro interrupt valid M97 User macro interrupt invalid P Interrupt program No H Interrupt sequence No Ma
146. dard instructions NC exclusive instructions include 1 ATC exclusive instruction D P ATC This is an instruction to function ATC or magazine index control tool exchange with arm etc ATC exclusive instructions are as follows e Tool No search e Tool change e Tool table forward reverse run e Pointer which indicates magazine index position forward reverse run e Tool data read write 2 Rotary body control instruction D P ROT This is an instruction to determine the rotary body s target position or rotation direction or to function as a ring counter This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine or turret based on the output data figured from ATC exclusive instruction tool No search processing or when controlling the rotary body position Using the ATC and ROT instructions The order for using the D P ATC and D P ROT instructions when T is commanded or tool exchange is commanded is shown below T command Tool No search i Matching place No D P ATC K1 K1 Number of matches Error process Pointer or ring E s logical search counter value D P ATC ka K2 Fixed pointer method Rotary body index Turning direction Magazine turn _ Ring counter control D P ROT K1 D P ROT K3 Variable pointer N f steps gt umber of steps tod etc Pointer forward run reverse run D P ATC K5 K6 Tool table forward run reverse run D
147. dary axis can be set to one primary axis Up to 3 sets of primary axis secondary axis can be set in total for all the part systems Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous control control mode operation method Independent operation method Correction mode II 208 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction 1 Synchronous contro There are three ways of synchronous control a Position command synchronous control This is intended for a machine with low stiffness NC outputs matched position commands to the both axes so that the two travel in synchronization CNC compensation Primarv axis position _ Drive unit oo command compensation Secondarv axis Drive unit b Speed command synchronous control Choose this when the scale of the full closed system is set rather small or to avoid a mechanical conflict that would otherwise be caused because of machine stiffness etc By using position feedbacks from the same position detector the primary and secondary axes move in synchronization CNC Primarv axis compensation Drive unit position _ command compensation Position detector Secondarv axis Drive unit II 209 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction c Current command synchronous control This is intended for a machine with high stiffness Th
148. e System for Rotary Axis M system O L system O The coordinate system of the rotary axis ranges from 0 to 360 Note that however it can be displayed from O to 359 999 In absolute value command mode the rotary axis can make a turn or less not greater than 360 The turning direction depends on the specified sign A negative sign turns the axis in the negative direction and a positive sign turns it in the positive direction Note that a parameter can be used to move the axis to the end point taking a short cut In incremental value command mode the rotary axis moves the specified distance only 10 1 9 Plane Selection M system O L system O G17 G18 and G19 are for specifying the planes for the arc tool radius compensation coordinate rotation and other commands Xp Yp plane designation Zp Xp plane designation Yp Zp plane designation 1 A parameter can be used to set either the X Y or Z axis to which the additional axis is to be parallel 2 A parameter can be used to set the initialization status when the power has been turned ON or when the reset status has been entered to G17 G18 or G19 3 The movement commands have no connection with the plane selection Example With these program commands X100 is the axis which does not exist on the G19 Yp Zp plane Yp Zp are selected by G19 and the X axis moves by 100 mm separately from the plane selection G17 X100 R50 With these prog
149. e Z phase position when using encoder orientation PLG and external encoder or the proximity switch neighborhood when using the proximity switch method 2 Multi point orientation This function performs orientation to a position other than the Z phase position by inputting a shift amount with the parameter or PLC The shift amount is 0 to 35999 Unit 360 36000 0 019 Note 1 Orientation is possible only when the gear ratio is 1 1 for the PLG orient The orientation is completed at the PLG encoder s Z phase so when using reduction gears the orientation points will be generated at several points during one spindle rotation 8 1 7 Spindle position control Spindle C axis control M system A L system A This function enables one spindle drive unit to be used also as the C axis rotary axis using an external signal The C axis servo ON signal is used to switch between the spindle and C axis Spindle C axis Spindle Servo on Ly qpA Ax _aeo o Servo off Spindle C axis cannot be controlled Servo on _ C axis spindle cannot be controlled Reference position return state Reference position return is incomplete when the Z phase has not been passed Reference position return is complete when the Z phase has been passed C axis position data The NC s internal C axis position data is updated even for the spindle rotation during spindle control The C axis coordinate position counter is held during spindle
150. e arbitrary feed function controls the movement of the axes at the specified rates while the start signal is output from the PLC to the NC system PLC operations can be performed even during manual operation or automatic operation but they cannot be performed when an axis for which arbitrary feed has been assigned is executing a command from the NC system that is while the axis is moving I 217 17 Machine Support Functions 17 3 PLC Operation 17 3 3 PLC Axis Control M system A L system A Over and above the NC control axes this function enables axes to be controlled independently by commands from the PLC PLC axis control No of control axes Max 8 axes axes Simultaneous start of multiple PLC axes is possible Min command unit 0 001mm 0 0001 inch 0 0001mm 0 00001 inch 0 to 1000000mm min 0 to 100000inch min The feedrate is fixed regardless of the unit system Movement Incremental value commands from the current position commands Absolute value commands of the machine coordinate system O to 99999999 Operation modes Rapid traverse cutting feed Jog feed Reference position return feed Handle feed compensation Rotation axis Provided commands Absolute value commands Rotation amount within one rotation Rotates the remainder divided by rotational axis division count The axis rotates in shortcut direction by the setting of a parameter 8213 Rotation axis type Incremental commands
151. e axis selection code 1 3rd handle axis selection code 2 3rd handle axis selection code 4 3rd handle axis selection code 8 3rd handle axis selection code 16 3rd handle valid Override cancel Manual override method selection Miscellaneous function lock Tap retract Reference position retract Cutting feedrate override code 1 Cutting feedrate override code 2 Cutting feedrate override code 4 Cutting feedrate override code 8 Cutting feedrate override code 16 2nd cutting feedrate override valid Cutting feedrate override method selection Rapid traverse override code 1 Rapid traverse override code 2 Rapid traverse override method selection Manual feedrate code 1 Manual feedrate code 2 Manual feedrate code 4 Manual feedrate code 8 Manual feedrate code 16 Manual feedrate method selection Feedrate least increment code 1 Feedrate least increment code 2 Jog synchronous feed valid Jog handle synchronous Current limit mode 1 Current limit mode 2 Handle incremental feed multiplication code 1 Handle incremental feed multiplication code 2 4 CNC Signals PLC Interface Signals Magnification valid for each handle Handle incremental feed multiplication code 4 Handle incremental feed magnification method selection Tool alarm 1 Tool skip 1 Tool alarm 2 Usage data count valid Tool life management input Tool change reset Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 1 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 2 Manual
152. e commanded within a range extending from 0 to 360 d The max value of the radius can be set up to six digits above the decimal point Note 1 The arc plane is always based on the G17 G18 or G19 command If a command is issued with two addresses which do not match the plane an alarm will occur Note 2 The axes configuring a plane can be designated by parameters Refer to the section entitled Plane Selection Il 13 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation 2 R specified circular interpolation Besides the designation of the arc center coordinates using the above mentioned J and K commands arc commands can also be issued by designating the arc radius directly G02 G03 Xx1 Yy1 Rri Ff1 Also possible for additional axes A B C U V W G02 G03 Arc rotation direction Xx1 Yy1 End point coordinate values Rr1 Arc radius Ff1 Feed rate G02 or GOS is used to designate the direction of the arc rotation The arc plane is designated by G17 G18 or G19 The arc center is on the bisector which orthogonally intersects the segment connecting the start and end points and the point of intersection with the circle whose radius has been designated with the start point serving as the center is the center coordinate of the arc command When the sign of the value of R in the command program is positive the command will be for an arc of 180 or less when it is negative it will be for an arc exce
153. e is performed When the spindle motor is connected the C axis Is placed in the detached C axis turning table Status As a result the position feedback of the detector is ignored Coupled with C axis control POSITION The detached status gt lt is indicated on the right of the X 123 456 POSITION display on the POSITION screen and at the same Z 0 000 1 time the servo ready for the controller output signal is set to OFF C 345 678 gt lt The POSITION counter retains the value applying when detach was assigned Note Axis detach can be executed even for the absolute position detection specifications axis but when the axis is reinstalled the zero point must be set II 207 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction 17 2 3 Synchronous Control M system A L system The synchronous control is a control method that both primary and secondary axes are controlled with the same movement command designating the movement command for the primary axis also to the secondary axis This function is assumed to be used in large machine tools etc which drive one axis with two servo motors The axis for the base of the synchronization is called the primary axis and the axis according to the primary axis is called the secondary axis The axis detach function cannot be added to the axes used in the synchronous control The secondary axis is controlled with the movement command for the primary axis One secon
154. e secondary axis refers to detector feedbacks of the primary axis to synchronize its motion to the primary CNC Primarv axis Drive unit position _ command compensation Secondarv axis Drive unit II 210 17 Machine Support Functions 2 17 2 Machine Construction synchronous control mode The following two operation methods are available in the synchronous control mode a Synchronous operation This is a method that both primary and secondary axes are moved simultaneously with the movement command for the primary axis CNC system Axis motor A l axis control O la o a a Servo control il ha ce Machining program Servo control Servo control Z axis control Servo control Synchronous control operation method register Primary axis and secondary axis are both set to 1 NC control section Position control section Calculation of movement Reference position return directions and movement Backlash compensation amount Calculation of feed rate There is a function that checks the correlation between the positions of the primary axis and secondary axis at all times while the synchronous operation method is selected to stop the feed as alarm when the error between the positions exceeds the allowable synchronization error value set in the parameter However when the zero point is not established the synchronous error is not checked Eve
155. e synchronized state By designating the synchronized spindle phase shift amount the phases of the basic spindle and synchronized spindle can be aligned H D O R_A Selects the basic spindle Selects the spindle to be synchronized with the basic spindle Designates the synchronized spindle phase shift amount Designates the spindle synchronization acceleration deceleration time constant 8 1 8 2 Spindle Synchronization Il M system A L system A Whereas the spindle synchronization executes the selection of the spindles to be synchronized the start of the synchronization and other settings with G code in the machining program this function designates all these from the PLC The spindle synchronization control mode is established by inputting the spindle synchronization control signal While this mode is established the synchronized spindle is controlled in synchronization with the rotation speed assigned for the basic spindle 8 1 11 Spindle Speed Clamp M system O L system O The spindle rotation speed is clamped between maximum rotation speed and minimum rotation speed Il 58 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 12 External Spindle Speed Clamp M system O L system O This function clamps the spindle rotation speed at the speed set by parameter when the external spindle clamp signal which is externally input from the sequence program turns ON This is used for limiting
156. e the spindle stop input is ON during the tapping mode or during the thread cutting mode 2 The number of gear steps can be commanded up to four steps 3 The max spindle rotation speed can be set for each gear Note 1 S command can be commanded by eight digits However setting range of the parameter highest rotation speed and rotation speed limit etc are five digits or less So S command which can be substantially controlled are five digits or less Note 2 The display of S command is five digits or less display on some screens II 52 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 1 1 Spindle Digital I F M system O L system O This interface is used to connect the digital spindle AC spindle motor and spindle drive unit 8 1 1 2 Spindle analog I F M system A using MELSEC I O L system A using MELSEC I O Spindle control can be performed with analog voltage input type spindle instead of digital spindle 8 1 1 3 Coil Switch M system O L system O Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrums down to the low speed ranges by switching the spindle motor connections This is a system under which commands are assigned from the PLC 8 1 1 4 Automatic Coil Switch M system O L system O Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrums down to the low speed ranges by switching the spindle motor connections This is a sys
157. ected by parameter 1 Decimal point input type When parameter 1078 Decpt2 is 0 When axis coordinates and other data are supplied in machining program commands the assignment of the program data can be simplified by using the decimal point input The minimum digit of a command not using a decimal point is the same as the least command increment Usable addresses can be applied not only to axis coordinate values but also to soeed commands and dwell commands The decimal point position serves as the millimeter unit in the metric mode as the inch unit in the inch mode and as the second unit in a time designation of dwell command 2 Decimal point input type Il When parameter 1078 Decpt2 is 1 As opposed to type when there is no decimal point the final digit serves as the millimeter unit in the metric mode as the inch unit in the inch mode and as the second unit in the time designation The point must be added when commands below the decimal point are required Unit interpretation for metric system Type X100 Y 200 5 X100mm Y 200 5mm X100 F20 X100um F20mm min X100mm F20mm min Y200 F100 Y200um F100mm min Y200mm F100mm min X1 5 Dwell 1 5 s lt X2 2ms 2s Note 1 The F unit is mm min for either type inch system inch min Il 6 2 Input Command 2 4 Command Value 2 4 2 Absolute Incremental Command M system O L system O 1 M system When axis coordinate data is issued in a machi
158. ed parameter to OFF Il 24 4 Feed 4 2 Feed Rate Input Methods 4 2 2 Feed per Revolution M system A L system O By issuing the G95 command the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F as the feed rate per spindle revolution mm revolution or inch revolution The F command increment and command range are as follows M system Metric input mm Least input increment B 0 001 mm C 0 0001 mm F command increment mm rev Command range mm rev 0 001 999 999 0 0001 99 9999 Inch input inch Least input increment B 0 0001 inch C 0 00001 inch F command increment inch rev Command range inch rev 0 0001 999 9999 0 00001 99 99999 e When commands without a decimal point have been assigned it is not possible to assign commands under 1 mm min or 1 inch min e The initial status after power ON can be set to asynchronous feed per minute feed by setting the Initial synchronous feed parameter to OFF e The F command increments are common to all part systems without decimal point with decimal point without decimal point F1 0 001 F1 0 001 with decimal point Fls Filesi L system Metric input mm F COmmMang without decimal point F1 0 0001 F1 0 0001 ere with decimal point P1 1 Fis mm rev r commana without decimal point F1 0 000001 F1 0 000001 increment inch rev with decimal point F1 1 FA 1 e When commands withou
159. ed ON until the cycle start switch is pressed ON or during automatic operation when the mode select switch is changed from the automatic mode to the manual mode In rapid traverse The In rapid traverse signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by rapid traverse during automatic operation In cutting feed The In cutting feed signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by cutting feed during automatic operation In tapping The In tapping signal is output when the command now being executed is in a tapping modal which means that one of the statuses below is entered during automatic operation a G84 G88 fixed cycle tapping cycle b G84 1 G88 1 fixed cycle reverse tapping cycle c G63 tapping mode II 222 17 Machine Support Functions 9 10 11 12 17 4 PLC Interface In thread cutting The In thread cutting signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by thread cutting feed during automatic operation In rewinding The In rewinding signal is output when the reset amp rewind signal is input by M02 M30 etc during memory operation and the program currently being executed is being indexed The rewinding time is short so there may be cases when it cannot be confirmed with the sequence program ladder Axis selection output The Axis selection output signal for each axis is output to the machine during machi
160. ed for the arc end point coordinates and the end point coordinate of the linear axis but incremental values must be assigned for the arc center coordinates The linear interpolation axis is the other axis which is not included in the plane selection Command the speed in the component direction that represents all the axes combined for the feed rate Pitch 11 is obtained by the formula below I1 21 22 e p1 0 2r 0 e Os arctan ye xe arctan ys xs Where xs ys are the start point coordinates 0 lt 0 lt 21 xe ye are the end point coordinates The combination of the axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the specifications The axes can be used in any combination under the specifications The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle II 15 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation Example G91 G17 G02 X0 Y200 Z100 I 100 J100 F120 Z J Command program path Start point Start point XY plane projection path in command program Note 1 Helical shapes are machined by assigning linear commands for one axis which is not a circular interpolation axis using an orthogonal coordinate system It is also possible to assign these commands to two or more axes which are not circular interpolation axes When a simultaneous 4 axis command is used with the V axis as the axis parallel to the Y axis helical interpol
161. ed using the address D or H commands When a No is assigned by a D address command offset is provided in the form of the tool radius when it is assigned by an H address command it is provided in the form of the tool length b Type 2 1 axis offset amounts with wear offset M system As with type 1 type 2 is for the offset amounts used by rotary tools With type 2 four kinds of offset amount data are registered in one offset No the tool length offset amount tool length wear offset amount tool radius compensation amount and tool radius wear compensation amount When an offset No is assigned by address D as the offset amount the tool radius is compensated using the amount obtained by adding the tool radius compensation amount and tool radius wear compensation amount Further the tool length is offset using the amount obtained by adding the tool length offset amount and tool length wear offset amount Figure Example of how the offset amount is handled when Wear offset amount when using the type 1 tool length offset amount Offset types and II using type 2 are available for handling offset amounts Offset type Offset type Il Tool length wear offset Tool length offset amount y ZO 0 Workpiece Tool radius wear compensation A AG iy Ad amount Workpiece Il 72 9 Tool Compensation 9 3 Tool Offset Amount c Type 3 2 axis offset amounts L system Type 3 Is for the offset amounts used by non rotary tools
162. eded according to item 1 above The user should make an effort to reduce waste in this manner b When disposing a product that cannot be resold it shall be treated as a waste product c The treatment of industrial waste must be commissioned to a licensed industrial waste treatment contractor and appropriate measures including a manifest control must be taken d Batteries correspond to primary batteries and must be disposed of according to local disposal laws Disposal Note This symbol mark is for EU countries only This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex Il Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and or reused This symbol means that batteries and accumulators at their end of life should be disposed of separately from your household waste If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration This will be indicated as follows Hg mercury 0 0005 Cd cadmium 0 002 Pb lead 0 004 In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators Please dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection recycling centre Please help us to conserve the environment we live in
163. eding 180 Example G02 G91 X100 Y100 R100 F120 Y ES Arena ponteoordinates KE 120mm min 57 Current position K2 arc start point a The axes that can be commanded simultaneously are the two axes for the selected plane b The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle Note 1 The arc plane is always based on the G17 G18 or G19 command If a command is issued with two addresses which do not match the plane an alarm will occur Il 14 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation 3 2 3 Helical Interpolation M system A L system A With this function any two of three axes intersecting orthogonally are made to perform circular interpolation while the third axis performs linear interpolation in synchronization with the arc rotation This simultaneous 3 axis control can be exercised to machine large diameter screws or 3 dimensional cams G17 G02 G03 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 lid Jj1 Ppi FA Specify arc center G17 G02 G03 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rn Ff1 Specify arc radius R G17 Arc plane G02 GO3 Arc rotation direction End point coordinate values for arc End point coordinate value of linear axis Arc center coordinate values Pitch No Feed rate Arc radius The arc plane is designated by G17 G18 or G19 G02 or GOS is used to designate the direction of the arc rotation Absolute or incremental values can be assign
164. eens in the setting and display unit that cannot display all eight digits Il 60 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 3 Miscellaneous Functions M 8 3 Miscellaneous Functions M 8 3 1 Miscellaneous Functions M system O L system O When an 8 digit number MO0000000 M99999999 is assigned following address M the 8 digit code data and start signal are output to the PLC Apart from the above signals various special independent signals are also output for the following signals MOO Program stop M01 Optional stop M02 Program end M30 Program end Respective processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all M commands from M00000000 to M99999999 M98 and M99 have specific purposes and can not be used Note 1 There are some screens in the setting and display unit that cannot display all eight digits 8 3 2 Multiple M Codes in 1 Block M system O L system O Four sets of M commands can be issued simultaneously in a block Respective processing and completion sequences are required for all M commands included in a block except M98 and M99 Note 1 The code data and start signals of all the M commands in the same block are transferred simultaneously from the controller to the PLC and so high speed machine control can be done by the PLC processing sequence 8 3 3 M Code Independent Output M system O L system O When the MOO M01 M02 or M30 command is assigned during an a
165. em on the workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 4 G58 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 5 G59 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 6 The command format of the local coordinate system is given below G54 G52 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1l G54 Workpiece coordinate system selection G52 Local coordinate system setting Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Local coordinate offset amount The local coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the designated workpiece coordinate system local coordinate offset In the incremental value mode the position obtained by adding the local coordinate offset amount to the previously specified offset amount serves as the new local coordinate zero point If no workpiece coordinates are designated the local coordinates will be created on the currently selected workpiece coordinates This command is unmodal but the local coordinate system created by G52 is valid until the next G52 command is issued The local coordinate system is canceled by the input of the reset signal or by manual or automatic dog type reference point return Machine coordinate system G53 Local coordinate G54 G52 Workpiece coordinate 1 GRA Il 81 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 8 Coordinat
166. en F command is present in program 2 Feed rate based on parameter setting when F command is not present in program Note 1 The approximate coasting distance up to feed stop based on the detection delay in the skip signal input is calculated as below 5 Coasting distance mm F G31 rate mm min Tp Position loop time constant s position loop gain T Response delay time of 0 0035 s Note 2 Skipping during machine lock is not valid x Tp 1 Il 171 14 Automation Support Functions 14 1 Measurement 14 1 1 2 Multiple step Skip M system A L system A This function realizes skipping by designating a combination of skip signals for each skip command 1 G31 n method This function realizes skipping by designating a combination of skip signals for each skip command G31 1 G31 2 G31 3 The combination of the skip signals 1 2 3 and 4 are designated with parameters for each G code G31 1 31 2 31 3 and the skip operation is executed when all signals in the combination are input G31 n Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff G31 n Skip command n 1 2 3 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates Ff Feed rate mm min 2 G31Pn method As with the G31 n method the valid skip signal is designated and skip is executed However the method of designating the valid skip signal differs The skip signals that can be used are 1 to 4 Which is to be used is designated with P in the program Ref
167. en the program is actually being operated Thus it enables to resume machining in the middle of a program as if it had been continuously operated from the beginning without a suspension 11 3 5 Automatic Operation Start M system O L system O With the input of the automatic operation start signal change from ON to OFF automatic operation of the program that was found by an operation search is started by the controller or the halted program is restarted Automatic operation start ST Movement block G01 X 100 G01 Z 100 Automatic operation startup is performed on a part system by part system basis Il 93 11 Operation Support Functions 11 3 Program Search Start Stop 11 3 6 NC Reset M system O L system O This function enables the controller to be reset G command modals Initialized Initialized 2 Tool compensation data Retained Canceled no operations Memory indexing Not executed Reset M S and T code outputs Caer sl output pp ak stopped stopped stopped ica In reset signal In reset signal In reset signal In rewind signal 11 3 7 Feed Hold M system O L system O When the feed hold signal is set to ON during cycle start the machine feed is immediately decelerated and stopped The machine is started again by the Automatic operation start cycle start signal 1 When the feed hold mode is entered during cycle start the machine feed is stopped immediately but the M
168. enters the operation ready status the Ready signal is output to the machine Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details of the sequences from when the controller power is supplied to when the controller ready status is entered Servo operation ready When the controller power is turned ON and the servo system enters the operation ready status the Servo ready signal is output to the machine Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details of the sequences from when the power is supplied to when the Servo ready signal is turned ON In automatic operation run Generally if the cycle start switch is turned ON in the automatic operation mode memory MDI this signal is output until the reset state or emergency stop state is entered by the M02 M30 execution or the reset amp rewind input to the controller using the reset button In automatic operation start The signal that denotes that the controller is operating in the automatic mode is output from the time when the cycle start button is pressed in the memory or MDI mode and the cycle start status has been entered until the time when the automatic operation is terminated in the automatic operation pause status entered by the feed hold function block completion stop entered by the block stop function or resetting In automatic operation pause An automatic operation pause occurs and this signal is output during automatic operation from when the automatic pause switch is press
169. eparts from the center of the circle and by cutting along the inside circumference of the circle it draws a complete circle then it returns to the center of the circle The position at which G12 or G13 has been programmed serves as the center of the circle G12 CW clockwise G13 CCW counterclockwise The program format is given below Dd Ff Circular cutting command Radius of complete circle Compensation number Feed rate When the G12 command Is used path of tool center 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt 5b gt 6 gt gt 0 When the G13 command Is used path of tool center 0 gt gt 675745352 gt 51 gt 0 Notes e Circular cutting is undertaken on the plane which has been currently selected G17 G18 or G19 e The and signs for the compensation amount denote reduction and expansion respectively Radius of circle Offset amount Il 148 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 8 Multi part System Control 12 1 8 1 Timing Synchronization Between Part Systems M system O L system O The multi axis multi part system compound control CNC system can simultaneously run multiple machining programs independently This function is used in cases when at some particular point during operation the operations of different part systems are to be synchronized or in cases when the operation of only one part system is required Part system 1 machi
170. er to Table 1 for the relation of the P values and valid signals Skip can be executed on dwell allowing the remaining dwell time to be canceled and the next block executed under the skip conditions to distinguish external skip signals 1 to 4 set with the parameters during the dwell command G04 G31 Xx1 Yy1i Zz1 Ppi Ffi G31 Skip command Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates Pp1 Skip signal command Ff1 Feed rate mm min a Specify the skip rate in command feedrate F However F modal is not updated b Specify skip signal command in skip signal command P Specify the P value in the range of 1 to 15 If it exceeds the specified range a program error occurs c When the skip signals are commanded in combination the skip operation takes place with OR result of those signals Table 1 Valid skip signals 4 3 p2a 1 Il 172 14 Automation Support Functions 14 1 Measurement 14 1 1 4 PLC Skip M system A L system A This function enables skip operations to be performed by signals which are input from the sequence program Il 173 14 Automation Support Functions 14 1 Measurement 14 1 2 Automatic Tool Length Measurement This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by the commanded value between the measurement start position and measurement position lt stops the tool as soon as it contacts the sensor and calculates the difference bet
171. eration is set superposition is performed even when GO is in the constant inclination acceleration deceleration state If the GO command direction is the opposite of that for G1 GO will be executed after G1 has decelerated In the case of two or more simultaneous axes GO will also be executed after G1 has decelerated when the GO command direction is the opposite of that for G1 for even one axis Il 29 4 Feed 4 4 Acceleration Deceleration 4 4 2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration Deceleration M system O L system O This function performs acceleration and deceleration at a constant inclination during linear acceleration deceleration in the rapid traverse mode Compared to the method of acceleration deceleration after interpolation the constant inclination acceleration deceleration method makes for improved cycle time Rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration deceleration are valid only for a rapid traverse command Also this function is effective only when the rapid traverse command acceleration deceleration mode is linear acceleration and linear deceleration The acceleration deceleration patterns in the case where rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration deceleration are performed are as follows 1 When the interpolation distance is longer than the acceleration and deceleration distance rapid Ts Ts Td T rapid Rapid traverse rate T L T Ts Acceleration deceleration time
172. ering a Thread cutting up amount Assuming that thread lead is L the thread cutting up amount can be set in a given parameter in 0 1L steps in the range of O to 12 7L 8 Thread cutting up angle The thread cutting up angle can be set in a given parameter in 1 steps in the range of O to 89 Il 123 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 3 Face cutting cycle G79 a Straight cutting Straight cutting in the end face direction can be performed consecutively by the following block G79 X U_ Z W_F_ R Rapid traverse feed u 2 F Cutting feed b Taper cutting Taper cutting in the end face direction can be performed consecutively by the following block G79 X U_ Z W_R_F_ R Rapid traverse feed F Cutting feed r Taper part depth radius designation incremental value sign is required Il 124 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 3 5 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining M system L system O The shape normally programmed in several blocks for rough cutting etc in the turning machining can be commanded in one block This function is useful for machining program simplification Compound type fixed cycle for turning machining are as follows Longitudinal rough cutting cycle Face rough cutting cycle Molding material in rough cutting cycle Finish cycle Face cutting off cycle Longitudinal cutting off
173. fferent circuit e Observe that the command speed should not exceed the speed set by the parameter safety speed e Observe that the motor rotation speed should not exceed the rotation speed set by parameter safety rotation speed When an error is detected during observation the main power for the drive is shut Safe brake control This feature controls OFF ON of the brake control output signals through the safety signal compare process This can also perform a brake test by issuing a travel command from CNC to a motor with the motor brake put on Il 195 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 4 1 Operation history M system O L system O This is a maintenance function which is useful for tracing the history and CNC operation information and analyzing trouble etc This information can be output as screen displays or as files 1 Screen display showing operation history and event occurrence times The times dates year month day and hour minute second and messages are displayed as the operation history data The key histories alarm histories and input output signal change histories are displayed as the messages The part system information is displayed as the alarm histories For instance 1 denotes the first part system and 2 the second part system The history data containing the most recent operation history and event occurrence times 2 068 sets
174. formation is input Workpiece coordinate system 1 Workpiece coordinate system 2 Workpiece coordinate system 3 Workpiece coordinate system 4 Workpiece coordinate system 5 Workpiece coordinate system 6 W6 The command format to select the workpiece coordinate system and to move on the workpiece coordinate system are given below G90 G54 G00 Xxi Yyi Zzi G90 Absolute command G54 Coordinate system selection G00 Movement mode Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Coordinate position of end point The workpiece coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the machine coordinate system Settings can be performed in one of the following three ways a Setting using the setting and display unit b Setting using commands assigned from the machining program c Setting from the user PLC Machine coordinate system G53 Workpiece coordinate system 2 Workpiece coordinate G55 system 1 G54 Start Workpiece coordinate system 4 Workpiece coordinate G57 system 3 G56 Il 78 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 4 2 Extended workpiece coordinate system selection 48 sets G54 1P1 to P48 M system A L system When multiple workpieces with the same shape are to be machined these commands enable the same shape to be machined by executing a single machining program in the coordinate system of each workpiece In addition to the six workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G
175. g MELSEC I O 6 3 8 5 French 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 1 4 Automatic Coil Switch 8 1 2 S Code Output 8 1 3 Constant Surface Speed Control 8 1 4 Spindle Override 8 1 5 Multiple spindle Control 8 1 5 1 Multiple spindle Control 6 3 8 7 Chinese 8 1 6 Spindle Orientation 6 3 8 4 Italian 8 1 8 1 Spindle Synchronization 8 1 1 3 Coil Switch 8 1 11 Spindle Speed Clamp 8 1 12 External Spindle Speed Clamp 8 2 Tool Functions T 8 1 7 Spindle Position Control Spindle C Axis Control i Te 8 1 8 Spindle Synchronization iS Saas oa 6 3 8 7 2 Simplified Chinese Characters 8 2 1 Tool Functions T Command A OS o o 8 3 Miscellaneous Functions M E 8 3 1 Miscellaneous Functions 8 3 2 Multiple M Codes in 1 Block 8 3 3 M Code Independent Output 8 3 4 Miscellaneous Function Finish 8 4 2nd Miscellaneous Functions B 6 8 4 1 2nd Miscellaneous Functions AO oO 8 1 8 2 Spindle Synchronization II 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 47 48 48 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 52 53 53 53 53 53 54 59 56 56 57 57 58 58 58 58 59 61 61 61 62 63 O Standerd A Option O Selection C70 Series Class Page e Tool Compensation SSS 9 1 Tool Length Tool Position 9 1 1 Tool Length Compensation o 82 Tool Badia OOOO O O S CO sd o 83
176. g allowance when P Q command is Wk Cutting allowance in the Z axis direction k not given Rd Split count d e Modal data e Sign is ignored e Cutting allowance is given with a radius designation Aa Finish shape program No If it is omitted the present program is assumed to be designated Pp Finish shape start sequence No If it is omitted the program top is assumed to be designated Qq Finish shape end sequence No If it is omitted the program end is assumed to be designated However if M99 precedes the Qq command up to M99 Uu Finishing allowance in the X axis direction u e Finishing allowance when P Q command Ww Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction w fis given e Sign is ignored e Diameter or radius is designated according to the parameter e The shift direction is determined by the shape Ff Cutting feed rate F function The F S and T commands in the finish Ss Spindle speed S function shape program are ignored and the value in Tt Tool selection T function the rough cutting command or the preceding value becomes effective Il 128 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 4 Finish cycle G70 After rough cutting is performed by using G71 to G73 finish turning can be performed by using the G70 command The machining program is commanded as follows APO Finish shape program number If it is omitted the program being executed is ass
177. g sections were added to II FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 12 External Spindle Speed Clamp 11 3 4 Program Restart 12 1 7 2 Normal Line Control 14 1 1 4 PLC Skip 14 3 101 PLC Axis Current Limit 15 2 101 Insulation Degradation Monitor 17 2 101 Multi secondary axis Synchronous Control 17 3 101 NC Axis PLC Axis Changeover 17 8 3 Automatic Operation Lock Following sections were deleted from Il FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 12 3 1 High speed Machining Mode GO5P1 17 1 7 3 MELSEC Development Tool GX Simulator 17 8 102 200 Cycle Monitor Waveform display Continued on the following page Date of revision Manual No Revision details Continued from the previous page Following sections were re numbered 15 4 5 1 MS Configurator formerly 15 4 5 Servo Automatic Tuning MS Configurator 17 1 2 101 Built in PLC Processing Mode formerly 17 1 2 3 17 1 7 101 MELSEC Development Tool GX Developer formerly 17 1 7 2 Minor errors were corrected Sep 2014 IB NA 1500259 H Added Treatment of waste and WARRANTY Revised contents in order to support C70 software DD version The Specifications list was updated GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS was updated Following sections were added to II FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 5 Cylindrical Interpolation 3 2 6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation 4 5 3 102 Multiple spindle Synchronous Tapping 6 2 101 Machining Program Editing 6 3 8 3 German 6 3 8 4 Italian 6 3 8 5
178. gt 3 6 Packing t2 0 3 M4 stud bolt L10 B80 05 A Installation of screws other than M3 x 6 not possible Divide equally l _ 120 P y 56 2 General Specifications 2 10 Terminal block for Dual Signal Module Recommended 2 10 Terminal block for Dual Signal Module Recommended Terminal block converter module FA LTB40P produced by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING is recommended to connect the dual signals to the dual signal module Use the connection cable FA CBL LIL FMV M produced by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING A dual signal module requires two units of terminal converter modules and two cables 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 PA E A PA TON AAO nap FA CBL LIL FMV M cable length 05 as 0 5m 10 as 1m 20 as 2m 30 as 3m and 50 as 5m Connector and the terminal block Connection diagram B20 O pesan e O eee i FCN40P d d br para Ed bara Pong PORN d po Y pur Y o oe az Las as lao lasl az f 01 Bl L A1 VOOM OW Y YO OY GO C G GI CO CD Y EI C9 GI GO CD GI GI GO G GD GI G9 G9 GO GD GD GI GO 2 40 MILA40P 39 Note 1 Connect 24VDC to the terminals No 37 and 39 OV to the terminals No 38 and 40 Note 2 Input output cables must be protected against damage and mechanical stress movement
179. he external workpiece coordinate offset has been set are shifted Offset of coordinate system by G92 coordinate system setting Example where W1 is shifted to new W1 when the machine was at the position x0 yO above W1 and the G92 Xx1 Yy1 command was assigned when the workpiece coordinate system W1 is modal external workpiece coordinate system offset 0 interrupt amount offset 0 G92 offset amount X x0 x1 Y yO y1 Machine position The shifted coordinate system is returned to its original position by dog type reference point return or the program When the coordinate system setting is commanded by G92 all the workpiece coordinate systems from G54 through G59 referenced to the machine coordinate system undergo a shift Coordinate system created by automatic Coordinate system after coordinate coordinate system setting system setting by G92 y Machine gt coordinate system p Machine coordinate 5 system j G92 Xx1 o Yy G92 command Tool position y position Il 76 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 1 All the workpiece coordinates from G54 to G59 move in parallel 2 There are two ways to return a shifted coordinate system to its original position a Carry out dog type reference point return b Move to machine coordinate system zero point and assign G92 and G53 commands in same block to set the machine coordinate system G90 G53 GOO X0 YO Positioning at machine co
180. he forward and reverse rotation signals to OFF when opening the door so as to ensure safety Differences from door interlock The method used to stop the machine during automatic operation is the same as with the axis interlock function The servo ready finish signal SE is not set to OFF Cycle start is valid during door interlock However the interlock takes effect for the axis movements When this door interlock function door open signal ON is initiated during axis movement the axes decelerate and stop When this door interlock function door open signal is set to OFF the axis movement resumes Il 193 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 10 Parameter Lock M system O L system O This function is used to prohibit changing the set up parameter 15 3 11 Program Protection Edit Lock B C M system O L system O The edit lock function B or C inhibits machining program B or C group with machining program numbers from being edited or erased when these programs require protection Machining program A 1 7999 Machining program B User prepared standard subprogram 8000 8999 Editing is inhibited Machining program C by edit lock B Editing is inhibited by data protect KEYS Machine maker customized program Sea P 9000 9999 Machining program A 10000 99999999 15 3 12 Program Display Lock M system O L system O This function allows the display of only a target program la
181. he measurement start position to the measurement position it stops the tool as soon as it contacts the sensor and calculates the difference between the coordinates when the tool has stopped and commanded coordinates It registers this difference as the tool length offset amount for that tool If compensation has already been applied to the tool it is moved in the direction of the measurement position with the compensation still applied and when the measurement and calculation results are such that a further compensation amount is to be provided the current wear compensation amount Is further corrected G37 a RDF a Measurement axis address and measurement position coordinate X Z R The distance between the point at which tool movement is to start at the measurement speed and the measurement position Always a radial value incremental value D The range in which the tool is to stop Always a radial value incremental value F The measurement rate When R_ D_ and F_ have been omitted the values set in the parameters are used r1 d1 and f1 can also be set in parameters Start position Rapid traverse feed Measurement position Compensation amount Measuring instrument Sensor ON When the tool moves from the start position to the measurement position specified in G37 x1 z1 it passes through the A area at rapid traverse Then it moves at the measurement rate set in F command or parameter from the position spec
182. he rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration time constant and the interpolation distance respectively Consequently linear interpolation is performed even when the axes have different acceleration and deceleration time constants rapid X A A Next block X axis Tsx Tdx e rapid Z Lz 3 Next block Z axis 3 Tsz Tsz Tdz T ______ When Tsz is greater than Tsx Tdz is also greater than Tdx and Td Tdz in this block The program format of GO rapid traverse command when rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration deceleration are executed is the same as when this function is invalid time constant acceleration deceleration This function is valid only for GO rapid traverse II 31 4 Feed 4 5 Thread Cutting 4 5 Thread Cutting 4 5 1 Thread Cutting Lead Thread Number Designation M system A L system O The thread cutting with a designated lead can be performed Inch threads are cut by designating the number of threads per inch with the E address 1 Lead designation The thread cutting with designated lead are performed based on the synchronization signals from the spindle encoder G33 Zz1 Ww1i Xx1 Uu1 Qq1i Ff1 Ee1 G33 Thread command Zz1 Ww1 Xx1 Uu1 Thread end point coordinates Shift angle at start of thread cutting 0 000 to 360 000 Thread lead normal lead threads Thread lead precise lead threads The tables below indicate the
183. he setting display unit 1003 iunit will be rounded off Note 6 Designate the character string with or lt gt A program error P33 will occur without either them Up to 31 characters can be set Note 7 Command G10L70 G11 in independent blocks A program error P33 P421 will occur if not commanded in independent blocks Note 8 If data with decimal point is commanded without decimal point it is considered as decimal point valid Il 156 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 9 2 Compensation Data Input by Program M system A L system A The value of the workpiece coordinate systems selected can be set or changed using program commands The tool compensation amounts that are set from the setting and display can be input by program commands 1 Workpiece coordinate system offset input The value of the workpiece coordinate systems selected by the G54 to G59 commands can be set or changed by program commands External workpiece coordinate system setting Workpiece coordinate system 1 setting G54 Workpiece coordinate system 2 setting G55 Workpiece coordinate system 3 setting G56 Workpiece coordinate system 4 setting G57 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 setting G58 Workpiece coordinate system 6 setting G59 G10 L2 Ppi Xx1 Yy1 Zzi Parameter change command p Workpiece coordinate No Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Settings Note 1 L2 can be omitted Omitting
184. here the block following the thread cutting is completed Position where the block following the thread cutting is completed Ss Suspension position Chamfering angle 1 Feed hold Period when thread cutting is performed Il 97 11 Operation Support Functions 11 4 Interrupt Operation 11 4 5 Tapping Retract L system O M system O tated in the reverse be ro a NAAN ii PP et or emergency stop signal that is input during tapping and the tap is left so that it will be disengaged by inputting the tap retract signal engaged inside the workpiece the tap tool engaged inside the workpiece can If tapping is interrupted by a res d irection initiated by reset or emergency stop be used by an interruption is made to the initial point by tap retract Il 98 11 Operation Support Functions 11 4 Interrupt Operation 11 4 6 Manual Numerical Value Command M system O L system O On the screen of the setting and display unit the M S and T and B when 2nd miscellaneous function is valid commands can be executed by setting numerical values and pressing INPUT This enables operations such as spindle speed changing starting stopping calling and selecting assigned tools and replacing of the spindle tools to be done easily without having to prepare or revise the machining program Even in an automatic operation mode these operations can be conducted with block stop Furthermore the M and
185. hould operate on an external system to the product when any failure or malfunction occurs 2 Mitsubishi CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial purposes Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above especially those which are substantially influential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or properties CONTENTS I GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS toy eN CONU AMO ono o cda 1 1 1 System Basic Configuration DrawiNQ ccccccccconccnncccconcnnnonnnnncnnnnnnonncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnns 1 2 General Connect Diagram sees dasa erative paeve deus ls evade a adie eisai 2 tO COMPOMCME AM dSuneus se abe e a e a tebe sedabes 3 FS TONG Oat Usd eee en ek ca ponte oboe cutee acetate eer eaten 3 Roe Od ere mg A aR EE nC CT CE Tene ie ae Cer ete ee eae ene eee 22 aa OT Dl ee 22 E et ca baa tare sabe dante a E sane asa 24 poca fa ili BS ee teres ere ee een E E Ee ene E ne A eee eee rete 26 A 27 33 PenoneralDESVICO ida ad 28 134 Dua Signal Mod o a deal eee ae 28 2 General SPSCIIGA ONS ix acct rececet hte is 29 2 1 Installation Environment COnditions ccccccecccccccseeeeceeeeseeeeceeeseeeseeeeeseeseeeeeesseeseeeessaaeeeeesseaseeessssaaeeeees 29 22 BaSe UM oa eset Mamaule tau iisunni uaa etn naa tade eae Made eae Naor ansua 30 2 P OWE SUD Vis o dl dee eres 31 pa E a O OGP
186. hread Cutting 4 5 3 2 Pecking Tapping Cycle M system A L system This function performs cutting the workpiece to the hole bottom for a multiple number of passes by designating the depth of cut per pass The load applied to the tool can be reduced The amount retracted from the hole bottom is set to the parameters When the pecking tapping cycle is executed in the synchronous tapping mode the synchronous tapping cycle option and pecking tapping cycle option are required When depth of cut per pass Q is designated in the block containing the G84 or G74 command in the state where the pecking tapping cycle is selected by parameter the pecking tapping cycle is executed In the following cases the normal tapping cycle is established e When Q is not designated e When the command value of Q is zero G84 G74 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rri Qqi Ffi Eel Pp1 Ss1 Ss2 lid Jj1 Rr2 G84 forward tapping cycle G74 reverse tapping cycle Hole drilling position Hole bottom position Point R position Depth of cut per pass designated as an incremental position Z axis feed amount tapping pitch per spindle rotation Tap thread number per 1 inch feed of Z axis Dwell time at hole bottom position Rotation speed of spindle Rotation speed of spindle during retract In position width of positioning axis In position width of hole drilling axis Synchronization method selection r2 1 synchronous r2 0 asynchronous mb gt GO Xx
187. hrough the distributor from which the product was purchased or through a Mitsubishi Electric service provider Note however that this shall not apply if the customer was informed prior to purchase of the product that the product is not covered under warranty Also note that we are not responsible for any on site readjustment and or trial run that may be required after a defective unit is replaced Warranty Term The term of warranty for this product shall be twenty four 24 months from the date of delivery of product to the end user provided the product purchased from us in Japan is installed in Japan but in no event longer than thirty 30 months Including the distribution time after shipment from Mitsubishi Electric or its distributor Note that for the case where the product purchased from us in or outside Japan is exported and installed in any country other than where it was purchased please refer to 2 Service in overseas countries as will be explained Limitations 1 The customer is requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by him herself as a general rule It can also be carried out by us or our service provider upon the customer s request and the actual cost will be charged 2 This warranty applies only when the conditions method environment etc of use are in compliance with the terms and conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual users manual and the caution label affixed to the prod
188. i 4 e X axis tool wae Tool used for length offset e machining X axis tool length offset Z axis tool length offset Z axis tool length offset b Wear offset The wear of a tool nose can be offset Tool nose X axis tool nose wear offset amount Z axis tool nose wear offset amount Il 65 9 Tool Compensation 9 1 Tool Length Tool Position c Command format Tool offset is performed by a T command It is specified in eight digits following address T Tool offset is divided into two types tool length offset and tool nose wear offset The Nos of such two types of offsets are specified by a parameter Also a parameter is used to specify whether the offset Nos is specified by one or two low order digits of a T command 1 Specifying tool length and wear offset Nos together using one or two low order digits of the T command Teo L___ Tool length offset No and tool nose wear offset No Tool No IN Tool length offset No and tool nose wear offset No Tool No 2 Specifying tool length and wear offset Nos separately We eer eee ee Kx Tool length offset No Tool No Te KKKKKKE E Tool nose wear offset No Tool length offset No Tool No The tool offset for the L system is valid only for the X and Z axes Il 66 9 Tool Compensation 9 2 Tool Radius 9 2 Tool Radius 9 2 1 Tool Radius Compensation M system O L system These commands function to provide to
189. iagram 1 2 General Connection Diagram Display module GOT2000 Series GOT1000 Series oe H200 cable panel internal wiring lo Specifications including unit names cable EMG H100 Cable G302 cable panel external wiring names and maximum lengths of cables are Max 30m Max 20m subject to change without notice Always 24VDC gt ls confirm these details before placing an order Note Ethernet Module l ES i GT1 ae alee is aoe required for 5 1 LE gt Y 24VDC or 100 240VAC CPU Module MELSEC Q I O Module pica od Dual Signal Module s Intelligent Module I O Mod ule 1 Source Power AC DC gt I O 1 0 Mod Mod ule ule 5 6 P H500 Cable H500 H500 Max 0 5m Cable Cable PD dl Pd O Ww OD Cable for ternimal block Q170DBATCBLO5M FACBLODFMV M Machine I O gt Cable Max 0 5m Wins am Operation panel B AA A attery Q6BAT Battery Unit Q173NCBATC LICNE VO Terminal block type FAL TB40P DCIN 999 MPG 1 H400 Cable Y 24VDC Not used Max 20m Y a q PLC on Terminal block type FAL TB40P Manual Pulse Generator aaa UFO 01 2Z9 5VDC Cable 24VDC Not used G396 max 10m for wiring inside the panel SKIP signals 4 points 24VDC 990999 G395 max 10m for wiring H310 Cable 0 outside the panel Max 15m LR e G 380 max20m for wiring So 0 outside the panel H010 Cable
190. ical X axis is realized by controlling the rotation axis C axis and the linear axis V axis 1 V axis moves up with rotating C axis in counterclockwise Move from A to B 2 After that V axis moves down with rotating C axis in counterclockwise Move from B to C This enables the X axis to operate as if it has moved to right V axis V axis V axis X axis X axis Operation example of hypothetical X axis which is controlled by the rotation axis C and the linear axis V Current position aia Previous position A Last but one position Il 20 4 Feed 4 1 Feed Rate 4 Feed 4 1 Feed Rate 4 1 1 Rapid Traverse Rate m min M system 1000 L system 1000 M system The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis using the parameter The rapid traverse rate is effective for G00 G27 G28 G29 G30 and G60 commands Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied e Rapid Traverse Rate setting range Least input increment A C 1 100000 mm min min Least input increment B 0 001 mm 0 0001 inch Least input increment C 0 0001 mm 0 00001 inch L system The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis by the parameter The rapid traverse rate is effective for G00 G27 G28 G29 G30 and G53 commands Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied e Rapid Traverse Rate setting range Least input i
191. ified in r1 If the measurement position arrival signal sensor signal turns ON during the tool is moving in the B area an error occurs If the measurement position arrival signal sensor signal does not turn ON although the tool passes through the measurement position x1 z1 and moves d1 an error occurs Note 1 The measurement position arrival signal Sensor signal is also used as the skip signal Note 2 This is valid for the G code lists 2 and 3 Il 176 14 Automation Support Functions 14 1 Measurement 14 1 3 Manual Tool Length Measurement 1 M system A L system A Simple measurement of the tool length is done without a sensor 1 Manual tool length measurement M system When the tool is at the reference point this function enables the distance from the tool tip to the measurement position top of workpiece to be measured and registered as the tool length offset amount Fable 2 Manual tool length measurement L system A measurement position machine coordinates to match the tool nose on the machine is preset and the tool nose is set Parameter A axis tool to the measurement position by manual setting engi feed then the operation key is pressed thereby automatically calculating the tool offset amount and setting it as the tool Measurement length offset amount position Parameter setting Z axis tool length Measurement method a Preset the machine coordinates of the measurement positi
192. ignated the primary axis only will move Correction mode The synchronization is temporary canceled to adjust the balance of the primary and secondary axes during the synchronous control mode in the machine adjustment Each axis can be moved separately with the manual handle feed or the arbitrary feed in manual mode If the operation mode other than the manual handle feed and arbitrary feed in manual mode is applied during the correction mode the operation error will occur IH 215 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction Configuration example of multi secondary axis synchronous control CNC compensation Primarv axis position _ O Drive unit 0 command O Secondary axis 1 Drive unit vo et compensation Secondary axis n Drive unit O Block chart of synchronous operation method X axis control Y axis control Primarv axis Synchronous Secandarv axis 1 Multi secondary V axis control operation axis Synchronization Secondary axis 2 Independent operation Secondarv axis 3 Z axis control synchronous control operation method register 1 Synchronous operation 0 Independent operation IH 216 17 Machine Support Functions 17 3 PLC Operation 17 3 PLC Operation 17 3 1 Arbitrary Feed in Manual Mode M system O L system O This function enables the feed directions and feed rates of the control axes to be controlled using commands from the user PLC Th
193. ilder Guiada e When used with II the narrow range designated by the two types becomes the movement valid range e Can be rewritten with window function lI Outside Set by the user e The change or function of parameter can be turned OFF ON with the neide program command e Select Il or IIB with the parameters e Can be rewritten with window function IEA e Set by the machine tool builder Outside e Set by the machine tool builder e Can be rewritten with window function Il 185 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 2 1 Stored Stroke Limit I II M system O L system O 1 Stored Stroke Limit This is the stroke limit function used by the machine maker and the area outside the set limits is the entrance prohibited area The maximum and minimum values for each axis can be set by parameters The function itself is used together with the stored stroke limit II function described in the following section and the tolerable area of both functions is the movement valid range The setting range is 99999 999 to 99999 999mm The stored stroke limit function is made valid not immediately after the controller power is turned ON but after reference point return The stored stroke limit function will be invalidated if the maximum and minimum values are set to the same data Prohibited area Point 1 The values of points 1 and 2 are set using the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system
194. ime 0 5ms QY70 16 points common Sink type ae 18 point terminal block Fuse provided I O module Type Building Block User s Manual 32 points 5 to 12VDC Response time 0 5ms SH NA 080042 QY71 32 points common Sink type 40 pin connector Fuse provided f Transistor Source type 16 points 12 to 24VDC OFF time leakage current 0 1mA QY80 Response time 1ms 16 points common Source type 18 point terminal block Surge killer provided Fuse provided 32 points 12 to 24VDC OFF time leakage current 0 1mA QY81P Response time 1ms 32 points common I O module Type Building Source type 37 pin D sub connector Thermal l n Block User s Manual protection provided Short circuit protection SH NA 080042 provided Surge killer provided 64 points 12 to 24VDC OFF time leakage current 0 1mA Response time 1ms 32 points common Source QY82P type 40 pin connector Thermal protection provided Short circuit protection provided Surge killer provided 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 9 Analog output module a Voltage output module 8 channels Input resolution O to 4000 4000 to 4000 O to 12000 12000 to 12000 16000 to 16000 Digital Analog Converter Q68DAVN Output 10 to 10VDC Module User s Manual Conversion speed 80us channel SH NA 080054 18 point terminal block Transformer insulation between power supply and output modules b Current input module 8 channels Input resolution O to 4
195. ime taken for positioning at microscopically small distances in the G00 command is reduced Note 1 Whether acceleration deceleration before interpolation in the rapid traverse command G00 is to be performed always or not can be selected using a parameter setting independently from the high accuracy control assignment Il 164 12 Program Support Functions 12 3 High speed and High accuracy Functions 2 Optimum corner deceleration By determining the command vector in the machining program and thereby performing corner deceleration it is possible to machine workpiece with a high edge accuracy The figure below shows the pattern of the deceleration speed at the corners Optimum corner deceleration is a function of high accuracy control mode The speed change can be smoothed by the S shape filter the machine vibration can be suppressed and the surface accuracy improved At the corner the vector commanded in the machining program is automatically determined and the speed is decelerated at the corner A highly accurate edge can be machined by decelerating at the corner F Cutting feed rate VO Maximum allowable Inclination of acceleration deceleration speed deceleration before interpolation acceleration 3 Feed forward control A stable servo control with an extremely small servo error can be realized using the feed forward control characteristic to this CNC system Feed forward control Position loop gain
196. in an absolute or incremental value Taper height constituent in thread part radius value When i 0 is set straight screw is made Thread height Designate the thread height in a positive radius value Cut depth Designate the first cut depth in a positive radius value Thread lead Il 132 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions Configuration of one cycle In one cycle 1 2 5 and 6 move at rapid traverse feed and 3 and 4 move at cutting feed designated in F First time nth time Ad x s n d finishing allowance Cut m times at finishing Il 133 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 4 Mirror Image 12 1 4 3 Mirror Image by G Code M system O L system Using a program for the left or right side of an image this function can machine the other side of the image when a left right symmetrical shape is to be cut Mirror image can be applied directly by a G code when preparing a machining program The program format for the G code mirror image is shown below G51 1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1l G51 1 Mirror image on Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Command axes and command positions With the local coordinate system the mirror image is applied with the mirror positioned respectively at x1 y1 and z1 The program format for the G code mirror image cancel is shown below G50 1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 G50 1 Mirror image cancel Xx1 Yy1
197. in which the tool has just moved This function is an option Precautions e Bear in mind that the following will occur if the same data is set for the maximum and minimum value of the tool entry prohibited area 1 When zero has been set for the maximum and minimum values tool entry will be prohibited in the whole area 2 If a value other than zero has been set for both the maximum and minimum values it will be possible for the tool to move in the whole area 15 3 2 3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB M system A L system A A parameter is used to switch between this function and stored stroke limit Il With stored stroke limit IIB the range inside the boundaries which have been set serves as the tool entry prohibited area Il 188 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 2 4 Stored Stroke Limit IC M system A L system A The boundary is set for each axis with the parameters The inside of the set boundary is the additional movement range This cannot be used with soft limit IB The position of points 3 and 4 are set with the machine coordinate The area determined by points 1 and 2 is the prohibited area set with stored stroke limit Machine movement valid range Il 189 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 4 Chuck Tailstock Barrier Check M system L system O By limiting the tool nose point movement range this function prevents the tool from colliding with the chuck or tail stock
198. indle multiple spindle synchronous tapping valid oth spindle multiple spindle synchronous tapping valid 6th spindle multiple spindle synchronous tapping valid 7th spindle multiple spindle synchronous tapping valid Multiple spindle synchronous tapping valid Spindle Command Gear shift completion Spindle override code 1 Spindle override code 2 Spindle override code 4 Spindle override method selection Spindle gear selection code 1 Spindle gear selection code 2 Spindle stop Spindle gear shift Spindle orientation Spindle forward run start Spindle reverse run start Spindle forward run index Spindle reverse run index Spindle orientation command L coil selection Spindle torque limit 1 Spindle torque limit 2 Spindle torque limit 3 Spindle multi step monitor request Spindle multi step soeed monitor mode input 1 Spindle multi step soeed monitor mode input 2 External axis speed clamp Spindle stop monitor request 66 Data Type Output Signals PLC gt CNC System Command Speed monitor mode PLC axis droop release invalid axis KEY OUT Speed monitor mode User macro input 1032 PLC gt Controller User macro input 1033 PLC gt Controller User macro input 1034 PLC gt Controller User macro input 1035 PLC gt Controller PLC version code 1st axis index 2nd axis index 3rd axis index 4th axis index 5th axis index 6th axis index 7th axis index 8th axis index 9th axis index 10th axis index 11th axis index
199. ions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 3 3 Special Fixed Cycle M system A L system These functions enable drilling tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a simple 1 block program Special fixed cycles must always be used in combination with fixed cycles The special fixed cycles are as follows Bolt hole circle Line at angle Arc Grid 1 Bolt hole circle G34 The tool starts at the point forming angle with the X axis on the circumference of a circle with radius R whose center is the coordinates designated by X and Y and it drills n number of holes at n equal intervals along the circumference of that circle The drilling data for the standard fixed cycle of the G81 or other such command is retained for the drilling operation at each hole position All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the GOO mode The data is not retained upon completion of the G34 command Yy Ir Jo Kn Center position of bolt hole circle this is affected by the G90 G91 commands Radius r of circle it is based on the least input increment and is provided using a positive number Angle 6 at point to be drilled initially the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive Number n of holes to be drilled any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be designated 0 cannot be assigned When 0 has been designated the alarm will occur A positive number provides positioning in the
200. is intended for reference only as it varies with characteristics of the memory 4 In the following status the backup time after power OFF is 3 minutes The battery connector is disconnected The lead wire of the battery is broken 5 The battery should be changed after 5 years of use even an alarm has not occurred 48 2 General Specifications 2 7 Dual Signal Module 2 7 Dual Signal Module Use the dual signal module within the following specifications Specifications Q173SXY Q173SXY 2 32 points x 2 systems 32 points for PLC CPU control 32 points for CNC CPU Number of input points control 20 points x 2 systems for safety input 12 points x 2 systems for feedback input for output Photocoupler insulation Rated input voltage 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 PLC CPU control input 10ms default PLC CPU control input 10ms default value for digital filter value for digital filter CNC CPU control input 10ms for CR CNC CPU control input 2ms for CR filter filter 32 points common Input common method Common terminal 1A01 1A02 2A01 2A02 NCIO connector and PLCIO connector have each different common Input type Type 1 Current sinking 12 points x 2 systems 12 points for PLC CPU control 12 points for CNC CPU control Output insulation method Photocoupler insulation Rated load voltage 24VDC 20 15 0 1A x 8 points 0 2A x 4 points x 2 systems Common current 1 6A or less for each co
201. itive negative common type 40 pin connector d DC negative common type 16 points 24VDC 4mA Qx80 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms 16 points common Negative common type 18 point terminal block 32 points 24VDC 4mA QX81 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms 32 points common Negative common type a 37 pin D sub connector I O module Type Building Block User s Manual 64 points 24VDC 4mA SH NA 080042 QX82 Response time 1 5 10 20 70ms 32 points common Negative common type 40 pin connector 64 points 24VDC 4mA QX82 S1 Response time 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 3ms 32 points common Negative common type 40 pin connector 1 System Configuration 7 Analog input module a Voltage input module 8 channels Input 10 to 10VDC Output resolution 0 to 4000 4000 to 4000 O to 12000 12000 to 12000 O to 16000 16000 to 16000 Conversion speed 80us channel 18 point terminal block 1 3 Component Modules Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual SH NA 080055 Q68ADV b Current input module Q62AD DGH Q68ADI 2 channels Input 4 to 20mADC Output resolution O to 32000 O to 64000 Conversion speed 10ms 2channels 18 point terminal block Channels are isolated Power supply for 2 wire transmitter 8 chamnels Input O to 20mADC Output resolution O to 4000 4000 to 4000 O to 12000 12000 to 12000 O to 16000 16000 to 16000 Conversion speed 80us channel 18 point terminal block c
202. justment result End of servo adjustment Save Change the NC parameters and servo parameters Set the communication path between the servo tuning support tool and NC Create a program for adjustment These must be done before adjustment Set the optimum speed loop gain with which mechanical vibration should not occur Set the position loop gain with which vibration and overshooting should not occur Set the acceleration deceleration time constant Set the lost motion compensation amount Display the adjustment result Il 197 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 4 5 1 MS Configurator Need to prepare separate S W M system O L system O With MS Configurator the servo system s bode diagram can be measured by activating the motor with vibration signals and measuring analyzing the machine characteristics And the servo waveform measurement function is supported too Note This tool is free of charge Please contact us Il 198 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 4 5 2 NC Analyzer M system O L system O 15 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting With NC Analyzer the attribute of the servo motor system is measured and the bode diagram is output by activating the motor with vibration signals and measuring analyzing the machine characteristics And the servo waveform measurement function is supported too Note Please contact us to purchase this tool
203. le 6 at the point to be drilled initially the counterclockwise direction is taken to be Ir positive Angle interval A0 when it is positive the tool drills in the counterclockwise direction and when it is negative it drills in the clockwise direction Number n of holes to be drilled any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned Example With 0 001 mm least input increment NO01 G91 N002 G81 Z 10 000 R5 000 F100 N003 G86 X300 000 Y100 000 1300 000 J10 000 P 15 000 K6 Position prior to execution of G36 command X 300mm Il 118 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 4 Grid G37 1 With the starting point at on the position designated by X and Y this function enables the tool to drill the holes on the lattice with nx number of holes at parallel intervals of Ax to the X axis Drilling proceeds in the X axis direction The drilling operation at each of the hole positions is based on a standard fixed cycle and so there is a need to command the drilling data drilling mode and drilling data beforehand All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the GOO mode The data is not retained upon completion of the G37 1 command G37 1 Xx1 Yy1 lAx Pnx JAy Kny Xx Yy The starting point coordinates they are affected by the G90 G91 commands AX X axis interval Ax it is based on the least input increment when Ax is positive the intervals are provide
204. le data assignment The macro program is executed with the word data of each block as the argument Il 102 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions The following macro command functions are available Arithmetic 1 lt Expression gt commands Various arithmetic operations can be conducted between variables by the above lt Expression gt is a combination of constants variables functions and operators Assignment The portion in which the operator is to be given priority can be enclosed in of priority of Up to five pairs of square parentheses including the function can be used arithmetic The normal priority of operation is functions and multiplication division followed by operations addition subtraction Control 1 IF lt Conditional expression gt GOTO n commands 2 WHILE lt Conditional expression gt DO m END m The flow of the program can be controlled by these commands n denotes the sequence numbers of the branching destination m is an identification number and 1 to 127 can be used Note that only 27 nestings can be used 2 Macro commands 2 Specific G commands and the miscellaneous commands M S T B can be used for macro call a Macro call using G codes simply by assigning a G code it is possible to call user macro programs with the prescribed program number Format G lt Argument gt Gr G code for performing macro call The co
205. le torque limit In spindle multi step speed monitor In spindle multi step speed monitor output 1 In spindle multi step speed monitor output 2 In spindle stop monitor Data Type Input Signals CNC gt PLC System State KEY IN Speed monitor door open possible 1st handle pulse counter 2nd handle pulse counter 3rd handle pulse counter CRT display information Emergency stop cause User macro output 1132 Controller gt PLC User macro output 1133 Controller gt PLC User macro output 1134 Controller gt PLC User macro output 1135 Controller gt PLC CNC software version code Battery drop cause Temperature warning cause Spindle synchronization phase error 1 Spindle synchronization phase error 2 Spindle synchronization phase error output Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor lower limit Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor upper limit Spindle synchronization Phase offset data APLC input signal 1 10 NC exclusive instruction DDWR DDRD error ZR device No GOT window data changeover completion Encoder communication alarm Insulation degradation monitor Alarm output Insulation degradation monitor Limit value alarm output Part System State External search status M code data 1 M code data 2 M code data 3 M code data 4 S code data 1 S code data 2 S code data 3 S code data 4 T code data 1 2nd M function data 1 Tool No Group i
206. linear interpolation is performed Il 12 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation 3 2 2 Circular Interpolation Center Radius Designation M system O L system O 1 Circular interpolation with J K commands This function moves a tool along a circular arc on the plane with movement command value supplied in the program G02 G03 Xx1 Yy1 lil Jji Ffi Also possible for additional axes A B C U V W G02 G03 Arc rotation direction Xx1 Yy1 End point coordinate values lid Jj Arc center coordinate values Ff1 Feed rate The above commands move the tool along the circular arc at the f1 feed rate The tool moves along a circular path whose center is the position from the start point designated by distance i1 in the X axis direction and distance j1 in the Y axis direction toward the end point The direction of the arc rotation is specified by G02 or GO3 G02 Clockwise CW G03 Counterclockwise CCW The plane is selected by G17 G18 or G19 G17 XY plane Y G17 X G18 G18 ZX plane G02 G19 YZ plane Y Go3 Y Go3 Example See below for examples of circular commands X Z Y Z G19 Start point G02 F G03 I J End point Y Center a The axes that can be commanded simultaneously are the two axes for the selected plane b The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle c Circular interpolation can b
207. llite office India Bangalore Service Center PRESTIGE EMERALD 6TH FLOOR MUNICIPAL NO 2 LAVELLE ROAD BANGALORE 560 043 KAMATAKA INDIA TEL 91 80 4020 1600 FAX 91 80 4020 1699 Chennai satellite office Coimbatore satellite office MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD Australia Service Center 348 VICTORIA ROAD RYDALMERE N S W 2116 AUSTRALIA TEL 61 2 9684 7269 FAX 61 2 9684 7245 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION CHINA LTD CHINA FA CENTER China Shanghai Service Center 1 3 5 10 18 23 F NO 1386 HONG QIAO ROAD CHANG NING QU SHANGHAI 200336 CHINA TEL 86 21 2322 3030 FAX 86 21 2308 3000 China Ningbo Service Dealer China Wuxi Service Dealer China Jinan Service Dealer China Hangzhou Service Dealer China Wuhan Service Satellite China Beijing Service Center 9 F OFFICE TOWER 1 HENDERSON CENTER 18 JJANGUOMENNEI DAJIE DONGCHENG DISTRICT BEIJING 100005 CHINA TEL 86 10 6518 8830 FAX 86 10 6518 8030 China Beijing Service Dealer China Tianjin Service Center UNIT 2003 TIANJIN CITY TOWER NO 35 YOUYI ROAD HEXI DISTRICT TIANJIN 300061 CHINA TEL 86 22 2813 1015 FAX 86 22 2813 1017 China Shenyang Service Satellite China Changchun Service Satellite China Chengdu Service Center ROOM 407 408 OFFICE TOWER AT SHANGRI LA CENTER NO 9 BINJIANG DONG ROAD JINJIANG DISTRICT CHENGDU SICHUAN 610021 CHINA TEL 86 28 8446 8030 FAX 86 28 8446 8630 China Shenzhen Service Center
208. ly Facing side path mirror image ON Facing post Il 135 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 5 Coordinate System Operation 12 1 5 1 Coordinate Rotation by Program M system A L system A When it is necessary to machine a complicated shape at a position that has been rotated with respect to the coordinate system you can machine a rotated shape by programming the shape prior to rotation on the local coordinate system and then specifying the parallel shift amount and rotation angle by means of this coordinate rotation command The program format for the coordinate rotation command is given below 1 Msystem G68 Xx1 Yy1 Rri Coordinate rotation ON G69 Coordinate rotation cancel G68 Coordinate rotation command Xx1 Yy1 Rotation center coordinates Rr Angle of rotation 1 Angle of rotation ri can be set in least input increment from 360 to 360 2 The coordinates are rotated counterclockwise by an amount equivalent to e orien the angle which is designated by angle of rotation r1 3 The counter is indicated as the point on the coordinate system prior to rotation 4 The rotation center coordinates are assigned with absolute values ri Angle of rotation Original local coordinate system Rotated local coordinate system wW Example Actual machining Il 136 12 Program Support Functions 2 L system 12 1 Machi
209. machine coordinate system The area determined by points 1 and 2 is the prohibited area set with stored stroke limit I All axes will decelerate and stop if an alarm occurs even for a single axis during automatic operation Only the axis for which the alarm occurs will decelerate and stop during manual operation The stop position must be before the prohibited area The value of distance L between the stop position and prohibited area differs according to the feed rate and other factors The stored stroke limit II function can also be invalidated with the parameter settings Il 187 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 3 Protection 15 3 2 2 Stored Stroke Limit IB M system A L system A Three areas where tool entry is prohibited can be set using the stored stroke limit stored stroke limit Il IIB and stored stroke limit IB functions The area determined by points 1 and 2 is the prohibited area set with stored stroke limit I The area determined by points 3 and 4 is the prohibited area Machine movement set with stored stroke limit IIB valid range The area determined by points 5 and 6 is the prohibited area set with stored stroke limit IB When an attempt is made to move the tool beyond the set range an alarm is displayed and the tool decelerates and stops If the tool has entered into the prohibited area and an alarm has occurred it is possible to move the tool only in the opposite direction to the direction
210. meters are set accordingly Note 3 Common variables can be classified into the following two types Common variable 1 Variables that can be commonly used throughout all the part systems Common variable 2 Variables that can be used in the program of the target part system Note 4 Variable names can be set for 500 to 519 Note 5 Re format is not required even after changing the option parameter of the number of variable sets After changing the option parameter the changed number of sets can be used by recycling the power Note 6 System variables 50000 to 51199 are held even when the power is turned OFF Note 7 System variables 50000 to 51199 are common among part systems Variable expressions Variable Numerical value 100 Numerical value 1 2 3 Expression 100 Expression Numerical value Variable Expression Operator Expression 100 101 minus Expression 120 Expression 110 Function Expression SIN 110 Variable definition Variable expression Note 4 Variables cannot be used with addresses O and N Il 107 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 2 4 1 100 Sets M system O L system O 12 1 2 4 2 200 Sets M system A L system A 12 1 2 4 3 300 Sets M system A L system A 12 1 2 4 4 600 Sets M system A L system A 12 1 2 4 7 50 50 x Number of Part Systems Sets M system O L system O
211. mpensation d For the feed rate designate a tangential rate on the polar coordinate interpolation plane orthogonal coordinate system using the F command The F rate is in either mm min or inch min units e Even when there is an error between the linear axis Hypothetical C axis and rotary axis center the control can implement polar coordinate interpolation while correcting the error Linear axis E edi Hypothetical X axis Non movable range Rotary axis e gt V x c center 2 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode G13 1 The polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode is established by designating the G13 1 command 3 Shifting coordinate system during polar coordinate interpolation G12 1 X_ C_ Workpiece coordinate system can be shifted under polar coordinate interpolation Use the following program format at the start of polar coordinate interpolation to specify the shift amount Specify the rotary center coordinates with respect to the shifted workpiece coordinate system G12 1 X_C_ X The 1st axis component of the rotation center coordinates on the shifted work coordinate C The 2nd axis component of the rotation center coordinates on the shifted work coordinate Program i Default workpiece G12 1 Xx Cc Hypothetical C coordinate zero point a Center of rotary axis Contour program hetical X axis Workpiece coordinate zero after shifted Work center Workpiece Il 18 3 Positioning I
212. n control The feed rates for the axes subject to automatic commands and the feed rates for axes subject to manual command are set separately The acceleration deceleration modes rapid traverse cutting feed are also set separately Rapid traverse override cutting feed override and second cutting feed override are valid both for axes subject to automatic commands and axes subject to manual commands Override cancel is valid for axes subject to automatic commands Manual interlock is applied to axes subject to manual commands automatic interlock is applies to axes subject to automatic commands Il 100 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 1 Program 12 1 1 1 Subprogram Control M system O 8 layers L system O 8 layers When the same pattern is repeated during machining the machining pattern is registered as one subprogram and the subprogram is called from the main program as required thereby realizing the same machining easily Efficient use of program is possible The call is designated with the program number and sequence number Pp1 Hh1 LI1 Call command Subprogram number Sequence number Number of repetitions Branch to subprogram Op1 Subprogram Nh M99 Return to main program Subprograms can be nested up to eight levels deep Main program Main program Main program Main program Level 0 P1
213. n during synchronous operation pitch error compensation backlash compensation and external machine coordinate compensation are performed independently for each primary axis and secondary axis Designation cancellation of synchronous operation is executed at all axes in position I 211 17 Machine Support Functions 3 17 2 Machine Construction b Independent operation This is a method that either the primary or secondary axis is moved with the movement command for the primary axis CNC system Axis motor X axis control Servo control Y axis control Servo control Q O V axis control Servo control et Z axis control Servo control Synchronous control operation method register Either primary axis or secondary axis is set to 1 Machining program ne ae NC control section Position control section Calculation of movement Reference position return directions and movement Backlash compensation amount Calculation of feed rate Even during independent operation pitch error compensation backlash compensation and external machine coordinate compensation are performed independently for each primary axis and secondary axis Designation cancellation of independent operation is executed at all axes in position Correction mode The synchronization is temporary canceled to adjust the balance of the primary and secondary axes during the synchronous control mode in the machi
214. n is handled with this increment This increment is applied per part system all part systems PLC axis Input Metric unit system Inch unit system Increment type increment Linear axis Rotary axis Linear axis Rotary axis parameter Unit mm Unit Unit inch Unit Least input increment o 0 001 0 001 0 0001 0 001 j 0 0001 0 0001 0 00001 0 0001 Note 1 The inch and metric systems cannot be used together 2 The command increment indicates the command increment of the movement command in the machining program This can be set per axis Command Metric unit system Inch unit system Increment type increment Linear axis Rotary axis Linear axis Rotary axis parameter Unit mm Unit Unit inch Unit 0 001 0 001 0 0001 0 001 Command incremeng m O 001 001 0 001 1000 10000 Note 1 The inch and metric systems cannot be used together 3 The least detection increment indicates the detection increment of the NC axis and PLC axis detectors The increment is determined by the detector being used Il 3 2 Input Command 2 2 Unit System 2 2 Unit System 2 2 1 Inch Metric Changeover M system A L system A The unit systems of the data handled in the controller include the metric system and inch system The type can be designated with the parameters and machining program The unit system can be set independently for the 1 Program command 2 Setting data such as off
215. n part systems the balance cutting function provides synchronization at the block start timing with multiple consecutive blocks Il 153 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 8 8 2 part System Synchronous Thread Cutting M system L system O The 2 part system synchronous thread cutting cycle is the function which performs synchronous thread cutting for the same spindle using the part systems 1 and 2 The 2 part system synchronous thread cutting cycle is 2 part system synchronous thread cutting cycle I G76 1 for synchronous thread cutting of two screws or 2 part system synchronous thread cutting cycle II G76 2 for thread cutting of one screw 1 2 part system synchronous thread cutting cycle Command format X U_ Z W_ Ri Pk Qad FI X axis end point coordinate of screw Designate the X coordinate of the end point at screw in an absolute or incremental value Z axis end point coordinate of screw Designate the Z coordinate of the end point at screw in an absolute or incremental value Height constituent of taper at screw radius value When i is 0 a straight screw is generated Screw thread height Designate the thread height in a positive radius value Cut depth Designate the first cut depth in a positive radius value Thread lead If G76 1 command is given in part system 1 or 2 a wait is made until G76 1 command is given in the other part
216. n resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester SOOVDC By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV Operation display LED display Normal ON Green Error OFF Noise immunity Contact OFF to ON 10ms or less ON to OFF 12ms or less output Mechanical 20 million times or more section Electrical 100 thousand times or more at rated switching voltage current Applicable tightening torque 31 2 General Specifications 2 3 Power Supply Q64P Base loading position Q series power supply module loading slot Applicable base unit Q38DB Q312DB Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B 100 to 120VAC 10 15 24VDC 30 35 100 to 240VAC 10 15 1200 to 240VAC 10 15 Input power supply 15 6 to 31 2VDC 85 to 264VAC 85 to 132VAC 170 to 264VAC Input frequency A 50 60Hz 5 Input voltage distortion yw 5 or less Max Max input apparent power apparent Max input apparent power 45W A ass SS at 24VDC ei 1 82A or less at gt input 1 3A or less P at 15 6VDC e 2 8A or less at 200VAC input 0 75A or less Repetitive peak current peak current 4A or AO tess ss 100A 1ms or less at igre Inrush current input 20A 8ms or less Rated output sine protection JADE Overvoltage ags SVDC 5 5 to 6 5V protection Efficiency A Oe ss or more Permissible instantaneous o 3 10ms or less at 24VDC input 20ms or less power
217. n tool life management No of work machining current value Near reference position per reference position Tool life usage data 64 No of work machining maximum value Error code output Error code output extension S code data 5 S code data 6 S code data 7 User Macro output 1132 Controller gt PLC User Macro output 1133 Controller gt PLC User Macro output 1134 Controller gt PLC User Macro output 1135 Controller gt PLC Chopping status Chopping error No Chopping axis Axis State Thermal expansion compensation amount Servo motor temperature Spindle State Spindle command rotation speed input Spindle command final data Rotation speed Spindle command final data 12 bit binary Spindle actual speed Spindle motor temperature Bit Type Output Signals PLC gt CNC System Command Contactor shutoff test signal Dual signals check start Output OFF check Integration time input 1 Integration time input 2 Data protect key 1 Data protect key 2 Data protect key 3 CRT changeover completion Display changeover 1 Display changeover 2 NC data sampling trigger Saving operation history data Edited data recovery confirmation PLC emergency stop Door open Door open II PLC axis control buffering mode valid PLC axis 1st handle valid PLC axis 2st handle valid 4 CNC Signals PLC Interface Signals PLC axis 3st handle valid Spindle synchronization cancel Chuck close Spindle synchroniza
218. nables the operating status of the sequence circuit to be checked on a MITSUBISHI Graphic Operation Terminal GOT The monitor functions include the following 1 Circuit monitoring 2 Batch monitor 3 Entry monitoring II 204 17 Machine Support Functions 17 1 PLC 17 1 7 PLC Development 17 1 7 101 MELSEC Development Tool GX Developer M system A MELSEC L system A MELSEC This function enables the data of the MELSEC CPU PLC programs to be developed and debugged using GX Developer installed in a personal computer with Windows Many and varied functions of the GX Developer make it possible to reduce the PLC data development and debugging time 17 1 9 GOT Connection For connecting a MITSUBISHI Graphic Operation Terminal GOT refer to the GOT materials Only when GOT has been bus connected with the DISPLAY interface of NC CPU or the basic base unit the CNC exclusive use screen CNC monitor function can be displayed The size of GOT corresponds to SVGA and XGA II 205 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction 17 2 Machine Construction 17 2 1 Servo OFF M system O L system O When the servo OFF signal per axis is input the corresponding axis is set in the servo OFF state When the moving axis is mechanically clamped this function is designed to prevent the servomotor from being overloaded by the clamping force Even if the motor shaft should move because of some reason in the servo OFF
219. nate Rotation by Program S S Aa 886 MA 888 12 1 6 1 Corner Chamfering Corner R S S A A888 1216 3 Geometric Gamma OOOO e MA o S TS MATI o S TS IEA o Aa S A TS 1217 2 Normal Line Control A ooo S 1217 3 Circular Cutting 8 121 8 Multi Part System Control o o J i 1218 1 Timing Synchronization Between Part Systems So O S O wW 1218 2 Start Point Designation Timing Synchronization J O O s METI S gt S O 1218 8 2 part System Synchronous Thread Cutting o gt S O ts i 121 9 Data Input by Program pos 1219 1 Parameter Input by Program S o AO S Aa o oe i 1219 2 Compensation Data Input by Program a 887 MAA o E E 121410 1 TappingMode SAA O poo y w il 12 1 10 2CuttingMode o S O o ts 12 2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions 60 122 1 Automatic Corner Override o S O O w 122 2 DecelerationCheck tt 12 2 2 1 ExactStopCheckMode 882 12 2 22ExactStopCheck 882 12 223 Error Detection 882 12 224 Programmable In position Check 888 12 3 High speed And High accuracy Functions i o e o a i 12 3 5 High acouraoy Control1 661 1 a A O Standerd A Option O Selection C70 Series Class Page 13 Machine Accuracy Compensation 8 13 1 Static Accuracy Compensation Ass 131 1 Backlash Compensation o y O y ote 13 1 2 Memory type Pitch ErrorCompensation A 8 13 1 3 Memory type Relative Position Error Compensation _ _ J 6 o A ter 13 1 4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation _ _ _ O J 6 A ter
220. ncrement Metric input 1 1000000 mm min min 1 100000 mm min min Least input increment B 0 001 mm 0 0001 inch Least input increment C 0 0001 mm 0 00001 inch Il 21 4 Feed 4 1 Feed Rate 4 1 2 Cutting Feed Rate m min M system 1000 L system 1000 M system This function specifies the feedrate of the cutting commands and gives a command for a feed amount per spindle rotation or feed amount per minute Once commanded it is stored in the memory as a modal value The feed rate modal value is cleared to zero only when the power is turned ON The maximum cutting feed rate is clamped by the cutting feed rate clamp parameter whose setting range is the same as that for the cutting feed rate e Cutting feed rate setting range Least input increment AAA AAEAEIEI lt o Least input increment B 0 001 mm 0 0001 inch Least input increment C 0 0001 mm 0 00001 inch e The cutting feed rate is effective for G01 G02 G03 G33 commands etc As to others refer to the interpolation specifications L system This function specifies the feed rate of the cutting commands and a feed amount per spindle rotation or feed amount per minute is commanded Once commanded it is stored in the memory as a modal value The feed rate modal is cleared to zero only when the power is turned ON The maximum cutting feed rate is clamped by the cutting feed rate clamp parameter whose setting range is the same as that for the cut
221. nd Setting The coordinate system handled by the NC is shown below The points that can be commanded with the movement command are points on the local coordinate system or machine coordinate system Lo G52 Ad Lo L Wo 54 c52 g 7 L G54 G55 Wo 55 G92 _ 4 e R ref Lo Local coordinate system zero point gt Offset set with parameters G52 Local coordinate system offset 1 Offset set with program Wos Workpiece coordinate system zero point G54 0 when power is turned ON Wos Workpiece coordinate system zero point G55 G54 Workpiece coordinate system G54 offset 1 1 The G52 offset is G55 Workpiece coordinate system G55 offset available independently G92 G92 coordinate system shift for G54 to G59 EXT External workpiece coordinate offset Mo Machine coordinate system zero point ref Reference point Il 74 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 1 Machine Coordinate System M system O L system O The machine coordinate system is used to express the prescribed positions such as the tool change position and stroke end position characteristic to the machine and it is automatically set immediately upon completion of the first dog type reference point return after the power has been turned ON or immediately after the power has been turned ON if the absolute position specifications apply The programming format for the commands to move the tool to the machine coordinate system is gi
222. ne adjustment Each axis can be moved separately with the manual handle feed or the arbitrary feed in manual mode If the operation mode other than the manual handle feed and arbitrary feed in manual mode is applied during the correction mode the operation error will occur I 212 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction 17 2 4 Inclined Axis Control M system L system A Even when the control axes configuring that machine are mounted at an angle other than 90 degrees this function enables to control by the same program as an orthogonal axis The inclination angle is set using a parameter and axes are controlled using the movement amounts of the axes which are obtained through conversion and compensation using this angle Note that the inclined axis is fixed to the 1st axis of the part system and the basic axis is fixed to the 2nd axis of the part system lt Example of use gt When the X axis serves as the inclined axis and the Z axis serves as the basic axis X Actual X axis Z Actual Z axis x Programmed X axis 8 Inclination angle Xp tan Xp the X axis position on the programmed coordinates on the orthogonal coordinates is the position of Za and Xa which are produced by synthesis of Z axis and X axis Therefore the X axis inclined axis movement amount is expressed by the following formula Ka X CO A dl 1 The Z axis basic axis movement amount is compensated by the inclined movement of the X
223. ne axis movement a Automatic mode The signal is output in the movement command of each axis It is output until the machine stops during stop based on feed hold or block stop b Manual mode including incremental feed The signal is output while the axis is moving from the time when the jog feed signal is turned ON until the time when it is turned OFF and the machine feed stops c Handle feed mode The signal is output at all times when the axis selection input is on Axis movement direction This output signal denotes the direction of the axis now moving and for each axis a plus signal and a minus signal are output respectively Alarm This signal indicates the various alarm statuses that arise during controller operation It is divided into the following types and output a System errors b Servo alarms c Program errors d Operation errors In resetting This signal is output when the controller is reset processing This signal will also be output when the reset 4 rewind command is input to the controller when the controller READY status is OFF when the Emergency stop signal is input or when a servo alarm is occurring etc Movement command finish In the memory or MDI automatic operation the Movement command finish signal is output when the command block in the machining program features a movement command and when that block command has been completed When the movement command and M S T or B comman
224. net communication unit GT15 Ethernet Ethernet 100Base TX 10Base T unit communication unit User s Necessary for connecting to Q173NCCPU Manual IB NA 0800314E GT15 J71E71 100 3 Option function board Model mame ema Roerne n GT15 Option Function Board GT15 QFNB32M Select either of these models when using GOT ee eran posi options MELSEC Q QnA circuit monitor functions is M d zz EE 0800301E GT15 MESB48M Ney 4 Protection sheet Protection sheet for 15 0 type Clear 5 sheets GT15 90PSCB Note Out of production GT15 Protective Sheet User s GT15 80PSCB Protection sheet for 12 1 type Clear 5 sheets EUA GT15 70PSCB Protection sheet for 10 4 type Clear 5 sheets 1 3 2 4 Option 1 CF card extension interface GT15 CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX C08 SET CF card extension interface front User s Manual IB NA 0800367E 2 External input output unit Input 16 points Output for scan 8 points 24VDC GT15 External I O Unit about 4mA Negative Common Input GT15 DIOR Output 16 points 1 point RUN output 24VDC Source Type Output User s 0 1A point Manual Negative common input source type output IB NA 0800425E Input 16 points Output for scan 8 points 24VDC about 4mA GT15 DIO Output 16 points 1 point RUN output 24VDC 0 1A point Positive common input sink type output GT15 External I O Unit Positive Common Input Sink Type Output User s Manual IB NA 0800382E
225. ng spot drilling cycle G98 mode Initial point t q C R point Initial point R point G98 mode Tagy mode Z point Z point M19 Shift G99 mode G84 Tapping cycle G85 Boring cycle G98 mode G98 mode Initial point Initial point R point R point Z point Z point G88 Boring cycle A M03 Al MO3 G89 Boring cycle NX G98 mode Initial point Initial point R point p R point Z point M05 G98 mode Z point Dwell Dwell Il 112 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 2 L system G83 to G89 G80 In the fixed cycle for drilling a machining program such as drilling tapping or boring and positioning can be executed for a given machining sequence in 1 block commands Drilling Drilling work Motion at hole Return axis start e a Cancel G83 Cutting feed EE position check Deep hole drilling cycle1 Intermittent feed Dwell traverse feed Cutting feed In position check Cutting feed Tapping cycle Dwell Reverse tapping cycle Spindle CCW Dwell Intermittent feed Dwell traverse feed Dwell Reverse tapping cycle Spindle CCW Dwell Intermittent feed Dwell traverse feed The fixed cycle mode is canceled when a G command of the G80 or G01 group is specified Data is also cleared simultaneously Command format G83 G84 G85 Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rri Qq11 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 Mm1 Ss1 Ss1 Dd1 Rri G87 G88 G89 Xx1 Cc1 Er Rr1 Qq11 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 Mm1 Ss1 Ss1
226. ng and deletion of parameters and the editing of programs from the setting and display unit Data protection is divided into the following groups Group 1 For protecting the tool data and protecting the coordinate system presettings as based on origin setting zero Group 2 For protecting the user parameters common variables CNC ladder R register data C register data and T register data Group 3 For protecting the machining programs Il 181 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 2 Display for Ensuring Safety 15 2 Display for Ensuring Safety 15 2 1 NC Warning M system O L system O The warnings which are output by the CNC system are listed below When one of these warnings has occurred a warning number is output to the PLC and a description of the warning appears on the screen Operation can be continued without taking further action Type of warning The servo warning is displayed The spindle warning is displayed System warning The system warning is displayed State such as temperature rise battery voltage low etc Absolute position warning A warning in the absolute position detection system is displayed 15 2 2 NC Alarm M system O L system O The alarms which are output by the CNC system are listed below When one of these alarms has occurred an alarm number is output to the PLC and a description of the alarm appears on the screen Operation cannot be continued without taking remedial action by machine trouble du
227. ning Method Support Functions Coordinate rotation ON Coordinate rotation cancel Coordinate rotation command Rotation center coordinates Angle of rotation Example Programmed coordinate Actual machining shape Il 137 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 6 Dimension Input 12 1 6 1 Corner Chamfering Corner R M system A L system A This function executes corner processing by automatically inserting a straight line or arc in the commanded amount between two consecutive movement blocks G01 G02 G03 The corner command is executed by assigning the C or R command for the block at whose end point the corner is inserted 1 Corner chamfering Corner R When C or R is commanded for linear interpolation corner chamfering or corner R can be inserted between linear blocks e Corner chamfering e Corner R Example Example N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 Cci N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1 Rri N2 Zz2 N2 Zz2 Note 1 If a corner chamfering or corner R command is issued specifying a length longer than the N1 or N2 block a program error occurs Il 138 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 2 Corner chamfering corner R II L system When C or R is command in a program between linear circular corner chamfering or corner R can be inserted between blocks a Corner chamfering II Linear circular Example G01 X Z Cci
228. ning program Part system 2 machining program Simultaneous and independent operation lt Synchronized operation Simultaneous and lt Synchronized operation Part system 2 operation only part system 1 waits lt Synchronized operation Simultaneous and independent operation II 149 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions Command format 1 Command for synchronizing with part system n n Part system number 1 Synchronizing number 01 to 9999 GE 1211 ML1 Synchro nized Y a 13L2 IM o 2 Command for synchronizing among three part systems n m Part system number n m 1 Synchronizing number 01 to 9999 121311 11 2L1 Synchronized Synchronize 111811 operation operation Il 150 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 8 2 Start Point Designation Timing Synchronization M system O L system O The synchronizing point can be placed in the middle of the block by designating the start point 1 Start point designation synchronization Type 1 G115 Command format Synchronizing command G command Own start point designate other part system s coordinate value a The other part system starts first when synchronizing is executed b The own part system waits for the other part system to move and reach the designated start point and then starts Own part system IG11
229. ning program command either the incremental command method G91 that commands a relative distance from the current position or the absolute command method G90 that moves to a designated position in a predetermined coordinate system can be selected The absolute and incremental commands can be both used in one block and are switched with G90 or G91 However the arc radius designation R and arc center designation I J K always use incremental designations G90 Absolute command absolute value command G91 Incremental command incremental value command These G codes can be commanded multiple times in one block Example G90 X100 G91 Y200 G90 Z300 Absolute value Incremental value Absolute value Note 1 As with the memory command if there is no G90 G91 designation in the MDI command the previously executed modal will be followed Incremental value command Absolute value command G91 X100 Y100 G90 X100 Y100 End point Current position X 100 Current position Program coordinate ll 7 2 Input Command 2 4 Command Value 2 L system When axis coordinate data is issued in a machining program command either the incremental command method that commands a relative distance from the current position or the absolute command method that moves to a designated position in a predetermined coordinate system can be selected When issuing an incremental value command the axis address to be commanded as the in
230. nnector ON time maximum voltage drop 0 1VDC TYP 0 1A 0 2VDC MAX 0 1A 12 points common Output common method Common terminal 1B01 1B02 2B01 2B02 NCIO connector and PLCIO connector have each different common Ou Surge ile Fuse Not provided External power supply 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 Provided thermal protection and short circuit protection Protection Thermal protection works for each 2 points Short circuit protection works for each 1 point 1 to 3A point Withstand voltage 560VAC rms 3cycles at 2000m elevation Insulation resistance 10M or more measured with an insulation resistance tester Simulator noise 500Vp p Noise width 1 us Noise withstand level measured with a noise simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz First transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1kV Protection degree IP2X Input response time Number of output points Maximum load current 49 2 General Specifications 2 7 Dual Signal Module Use the dual signal module within the following specifications Specifications Q173SXY Q173SXY 2 Protection degree IP2X 32 points with I O assignments as 32 points I O mixed unit Operation display ON display LED and 32 input points display for PLC CPU control Names of parts v 1 LED Shows the input signal state of PLCIO 2 Module No sticker Module Nos 1 to 3 should be written on this sticker when multiple dual signal mod
231. ntenance A Follow the power specifications input voltage range frequency range momentary power failure time range described in this manual A Follow the environment conditions ambient temperature humidity vibration atmosphere described in this manual DA lf the parameter is used to set the temperature rise detection function to invalid overheating may occur thereby disabling control and possibly resulting in the axes running out of control which in turn may result in machine damage and or bodily injury or destruction of the unit It is for this reason that the detection function is normally left valid for operation Treatment of waste The following two laws will apply when disposing of this product Considerations must be made to each law The following laws are in effect in Japan Thus when using this product overseas the local laws will have a priority If necessary indicate or notify these laws to the final user of the product 1 Requirements for Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources a Recycle as much of this product as possible when finished with use b When recycling often parts are sorted into steel scraps and electric parts etc and sold to scrap contractors Mitsubishi recommends sorting the product and selling the members to appropriate contractors 2 Requirements for Law for Treatment of Waste and Cleaning a Mitsubishi recommends recycling and selling the product when no longer ne
232. nterpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation 3 2 101 Hypothetical Linear Axis Control M system A L system Using 1 linear axis and 1 rotary axis this function composes a hypothetical linear axis which orthogonally intersects the real linear axis Thus 3 dimensional positioning and compensation operation can be executed by configuring two linear axes and one rotation axis This function reduces actual linear axes so movement mechanism will be eliminated and the machine configuration can be simplified In the figure below the movement mechanism of X axis direction which intersects with Y axis is not required Although a hypothetical axis has no actual linear axis it needs setting as CNC control axis There are three actual axes and two hypothetical axes so total of five CNC control axes are required for the figure below A mode to control a hypothetical axis is called hypothetical axis command mode and a mode to control actual axis is called actual axis command mode Each mode can be switched with a control signal from PLC I F This function is valid both automatic operation and manual feed Y axis actual axis X axis Hypothetical axis l Center of rotation C axis Actual axis i l V axis Hypothetical axis Movement range es j Z axis Actual axis Image of Hypothetical linear axis Il 19 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation Movement of hypothet
233. o the rotation speed of a spindle assigned by the machining program command during automatic operation or by manual operation There are two types of override 1 Code method Using an external signal override can be applied to the commanded rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle in 10 increments from 50 to 120 2 Value setting method Using an external signal override can be applied to the commanded rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle in 1 increments from 0 to 200 Note 1 Selection between code method and value setting method can be designated by user PLC processing II 55 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 5 Multiple spindle Control When using a machine tool equipped with several spindles up to seven spindles this function controls those spindles Multiple spindle control Control based on a spindle selection command such as G43 1 and spindle control command S or SO 5 etc The figure below shows an example of the configuration for a machine which is equipped with second and third spindles Tool spindle third spindle Second spindle 8 1 5 1 Multiple spindle Control M system O L system O 1 Spindle selection commands Using the spindle selection command such as G43 1 G group 20 this function makes it possible to switch the spindle among the first through seventh spindles to which
234. ock is not moved to During manual operation the following same direction commands are ignored 3 During the current limit the droop generated by the current limit can be canceled with external signals Note that the axis must not be moving 4 The setting range of the current limit value is 1 to 300 Commands that exceed this range will cause a program error P35 CMD VALUE OVER will be displayed 5 If a decimal point is designated with the G10 command only the integer will be valid Example G10 L14 X10 123 The current limit value will be set to 10 6 For the axis name C the current limit value cannot be set from the program G10 command To set from the program set the axis address with an incremental axis name or set the axis name to one other than C 14 3 101 PLC Axis Current Limit M system O L system O A current limit is available for the PLC axis as well as for the NC axis This function can be used for actions such as stopper operation Il 180 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 1 Safety Switches 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 1 Safety Switches 15 1 1 Emergency Stop M system O L system O All operations are stopped by the emergency stop signal input and at the same time the drive section is shutoff to stop movement of the machine The servo ready signal is turned OFF 15 1 2 Data Protection Key M system O L system O With the input from the user PLC it is possible to prohibit the setti
235. ode is programmed at the head of a block and the optional block skip input signal from the external source is turned ON for automatic operation the block with the code is skipped If the optional block skip signal is turned OFF the block with the code will be executed without being skipped Optional block skip Programming example a Switch OFF o Switch ON N1 Optional block skip 1 is ON Optional block skip 2 is ON Note 1 There are nine optional block skip switches corresponding to Note 2 1 of 1N4 can be omitted 11 1 2 Optional Block Skip Addition M system O L system O When n n 1 to 9 slash code is programmed at the head of a block and the optional block skip n input signal from the external source is turned ON for automatic operation the block with the n code is skipped Il 90 11 Operation Support Functions 11 1 Program Control 11 1 3 Single Block M system O L system O The commands for automatic operation can be executed one block at a time block stop by turning ON the single block input signal When the single block input signal is turned ON temporarily during continuous operation the machine will stop after that block has been executed When operation is switched to another automatic operation mode for example memory operation mode to MDI operation mode during continuous operation the machine will stop after that block has been executed Single block in the multi p
236. of the first reference point return the tool radius compensation or nose radius compensation has not been canceled it will be temporarily canceled by the movement to the interim point The compensation is restored by the next movement after the return Note 4 If at the time of the first reference point return the tool length offset has not been canceled the offset will be canceled by the movement from the interim point to the first reference point and the offset amount will also be cleared It is possible to cancel the tool length offset temporarily using a parameter instead In this case however the offset is restored by the next movement command Note 5 Interpolation or non interpolation can be selected using a parameter for the movement up to the G28 interim point or for the movement from the G29 interim point to the command point Non interpolation applies for movement from the G28 interim point to the reference point and movement up to the G29 interim point Note 6 The machine will not stop at the interim point even when a single block is selected Il 86 10 Coordinate System 10 2 Return 10 2 3 2nd 3rd 4th Reference Position Return M system O L system O As with automatic 1st reference point return commanding G30Pn during automatic operation enables the tool to be returned to the set points 2nd 3rd or 4th reference points characteristic to the machine The 2nd 3rd and 4th reference points can be set by parameters
237. off time Across inputs LG and outputs FG 2 830VAC rms 3 cycles Altitude 2 000m 6 561 68ft SOOVAC across primary and Dielectric withstand voltage 5VDC 10M or more Input and LG batched output and FG batched Insulation resistance measured with an insulation batch input LG batch output FG resistance tester 10M or m ore by insulation resistance tester 500VDC By noise simulator of 500Vp p By noise simulator of 1 500Vp p noise voltage 1 u s noise noise voltage 1 u s noise width width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Noise immunity and 25 to 60Hz noise frequen Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV a LED display Normal LED display Normal LED display Normal p p ay ON Green Error OFF ON Green Error OFF ON Green Error OFF Fue Built in Unchangeable by user a Po ERReonttact ss contact sisal eek rrent load OFF to ON 10ms or less ON to OFF 12ms or less Life time Mechanical 20 million times or m ore Electrical 100 thousand times or more at rated switching voltage current Fuse None IN IN Contact output section 32 2 General Specifications e 2 oO 4 5 2 3 Power Supply Overcurrent protection The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5V 24VDC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in the circuit exceeds the specified value The LED of the power supply module is turned off or lights up in dim green when voltage is lowered
238. oint terminal block Temperature Control Module i User s Manual 4 channels Platinum RTD Pt100 JPt100 SH NA 080121 Q64TCRTBW With heater disconnection detection Sampling period 0 5s 4channels 2 units of 18 point terminal block d Loop controller Loop control module Loop Control Module User s Q62HLC Thermocouple input 2ch 5 modes of PID control Manual Output 4 to 20mA SH NA 080573ENG l 11 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 12 Channel isolated pulse input module 8 channels 30kpps 10kpps 1kpps 100pps 50pps Channel Isolated Pulse Input QD60P8 G 10pps 1pps 0 1pps Module User s Manual Count input signal 5 12 to 24VDC SH NA 080313E 13 High speed counter module 2 channels 200 100 10kpps Count input signal 5 12 24VDC External input 5 12 24VDC Coincidence output transistor sink type 12 24VDC 0 5A point 2A common 40 pin connector 2 channels 500 200 100 10kpps Count input signal EIA Standard RS 422 A differential line driver level High Speed Counter Module External input 5 12 24VDC User s Manual Coincidence output transistor sink type SH NA 080036 12 24VDC 0 5A point 2A common 40 pin connector 2 channels 200 100 10kpps Count input signal 5 12 24VDC External input 5 12 24VDC Coincidence output transistor Source type 12 24VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common 40 pin connector 14 Ethernet Model mame remar 2 Roerne QJ71E71 100 10BASE T 100BASE TX
239. ol radius compensation Through a combination with the G command and D address assignment they compensate for the actual tool center path either inside or outside the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the tool radius The tool path is calculated by the intersection point arithmetic system and as a result excessive cut amounts on the inside of corners are avoided Vector change during tool radius compensation Corner arc during tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation cancel Tool radius compensation left command Tool radius compensation right command Tool center path r Tool radius compensation amount Programmed path The tool radius compensation command controls the compensation from that block in which G41 or G42 is commanded In the tool radius compensation mode the program is read up to five blocks ahead including blocks with no movement and interference check using tool radius is conducted up to three blocks ahead in any of those blocks with movement G17 G01 G17 G01 G41 Xx1 Yy1 Dd1 G41 Xx1 Yy1i Ddi Compensation plane Cutting command Left compensation Movement axis Compensation No The compensation plane movement axes and next advance direction vector are based on the plane selection command designated by G17 to G19 G17 XY plane X Y J G18 ZX plane Z X K I G19 YZ plane Y Z J K Il 67 9 Tool Compensation 9 2 Tool Radius An arc is inserted
240. ommands ld Interval d it is based on the least input increment and when d is negative drilling proceeds in the point symmetrical direction centered on the starting point JO Angle 6 the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive Kn Number n of holes to be drilled including the starting point any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be assigned Example O With 0 001 mm least input increment N 5 holes G91 G81 Z 10 000 R5 000 LO F100 G35 X200 000 Y100 000 1100 000 J 30 000 K5 y 1 100Mm Position prior to execution of G35 command Il 117 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 3 Arc G36 The tool starts at the point forming angle 6 with the X axis on the circumference of a circle with radius r whose center is the coordinates designated by X and Y and it drills n number of holes aligned at angle interval Ad As with the bolt hole circle function the drilling operation at each of the hole positions is based on a hold drilling fixed cycle and so there is a need to retain the drilling data beforehand All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the GOO mode The data is not retained upon completion of the G86 command G36 Xx Yy ir Ja PAO Kn Xx Yy Center coordinates of arc they are affected by the G90 G91 commands Radius r of arc it is based on the least input increment and is provided with a positive number Ang
241. on in a given parameter as the measurement basic value b Select a tool whose tool length offset amount is to be measured c Set the tool nose to the measurement position by manual feed d Press the input key The tool length offset amount is calculated and displayed on the setting area Tool length offset amount machine coordinates measurement basic value e Again press the input key to store the value in the memory as the tool length offset amount of the tool Il 177 14 Automation Support Functions 14 2 Tool Life Management 14 2 Tool Life Management 14 2 1 Tool Life Management 14 2 1 1 Tool Life Management M system A L system A 1 M system For the tool mounted on the spindle that tool s usage time 0 to 4000 hours or frequency of use 0 to 65000 times is accumulated and the tool usage state is monitored The life of up to 100 tools can be managed 2 L system Tool life management is performed using the amount of time and frequency of use of a tool The life for up to 80 tools tool numbers 1 to 80 can be managed a Management by the time of use The cutting time after specification of a tool selection T command G01 G02 and G33 is added to the tool use time for the specified tool If the use time reaches the life time when a tool selection command is specified an alarm is given b Management by the frequency of use The tool use counter corresponding to the specified tool No is incremented each
242. onnector cover or the blank cover module QG60 to prevent entry of dirt 4 Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit Screw size M3x12 5 Base fixing hole Hole for fixing this base unit onto the panel of the control panel for M4 screw Note DIN rail installation is not available when installing the CNC CPU module onto the basic base unit The installation may cause the module s malfunction due to vibration 30 2 General Specifications 2 3 Power Supply 2 3 Power Supply C70 uses Q61P 100 240VAC input 5VDC 6A output Q63P 24VDC input 5VDC 6A output Q64PN 100 240VAC input 5VDC 8 5A output or Q64P 100 120VAC 200 240VAC input 5VDC 8 5A output Note Q64P has gone out of production Specifications Item Q61P Base loading position Q series power supply module loading slot Applicable base unit Q38DB Q312DB Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B 100 240VAC 10 15 Input power supply 85 264VAC Input frequency 50 60Hz 5 Input voltage distortion factor 5 or less Max input apparent power 130VA 20A 8ms or less 24VDC 5VDC 6 6A or more ont po ARA A Overvoltage protection SVDC 5 5 to 6 5V Permissible instantaneous o 3 20ms or less power off time Across inputs LG and outputs FG Dielectric withstand voltage 2830VAC rms 3 cycles Altitude 2000m Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs for LG FG across outputs for LG FG IInsulatio
243. ontinued but it cannot be started after reset or MO2 M30 run ends It can be started after block stop or feed hold When the temperature falls below the specified temperature the alarm is released and the temperature rise signal is turned OFF 15 2 6 Battery Alarm Warning M system O L system O When it is time for changing batteries an alarm and warning are displayed When a warning is displayed immediately backup all the necessary data and change batteries When an alarm is displayed there is a possibility that memory has been lost Il 183 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 2 Display for Ensuring Safety 15 2 101 Insulation Degradation Monitor M system A L system A Insulation degradation monitor function monitors insulation degradation by insulation resistance value calculated from leakage current values of servo motors and spindle motors that are measured with a zero phase sequence current transformer ZCT user prepared a leakage transducer user prepared and an analog digital conversion unit Q66AD DG to assist machine breakdown prevention NCCPU monitors the resistance value and an alarm warning occurs when the value becomes less than the preset alarm limit value Users can utilize it by PLC processing or combining with an insulation degradation monitor screen for GOT a Japanese sample of which is available not available in other languages A D conversion unit Q66AD DG Spec 6 channels axes measurable Input DC 4
244. operation is not suspended The commands in the next block are placed on standby and their execution is started as soon as the signal is turned ON Note 1 The signal is valid for all blocks including internal operation block such as fixed cycles 15 3 6 External Deceleration M system O L system O This function reduces the feed rate to the deceleration speed set by the parameter when the external deceleration input signal has been setto ON External deceleration input signals are provided for each axis and for each movement direction and and a signal is valid when the signal in the direction coinciding with the direction of the current movement has been input External deceleration speed can be set commonly for axes of each part system or it can be set for each axis The choice of which setting to use can be set with a parameter When an axis is to be returned in the opposite direction its speed is returned immediately to the regular speed assigned by the command When non interpolation positioning is performed during manual operation or automatic operation only the axis for which the signal that coincides with the direction of the current movement has been input will decelerate However with interpolation during automatic operation the feed rate of the axis will be reduced to the deceleration rate if there is even one axis for which the signal that coincides with the direction of current movement has been input Il 191 15
245. or the power supply module may be delayed by the capacitor in the AC input module Thus connect a load of approx 30mA per AC input module to the AC line 2 For DC input power supply a An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 10ms will cause 24VDC down to be detected but operation will continue b An instantaneous power failure lasting in excess of 10ms may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load This is for a 24VDC input This is 10ms or less for less than 24VDC Inrush current When power is switched on again immediately within 5 seconds after power off an inrush current of more than the specified value 2ms or less may flow Reapply power 5 seconds after power off When selecting a fuse and breaker in the external circuit take account of the blow out detection characteristics and above matters Operation indication During the operation do not allow the input voltage to change from 200VAC level 170 to 264VAC to 100VAC level 85 to 132VAC If changed the POWER LED of the module turns off and the system operation stops Outline dimension Q61 P Q63P mm Q64PN Q64P mm 98 90 115 33 2 General Specifications 2 3 Power Supply Names of parts The following shows the names of the parts of each power module Q63P 24VDC input 5VDC 6A output Q61P 100 240VAC input 5VDC 6A output Q64PN 100 240VA
246. ordinate system zero point G92 G53 X0 YO Coordinate system zero setting in machine coordinate system This returns all the workpiece coordinates from G54 to G59 to their original positions 10 1 3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting M system O L system O After the power is turned ON the basic machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system are automatically set without executing the zero point return The coordinate systems created are given below 1 Machine coordinate system corresponding to G53 2 G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate system 3 Local coordinate systems created under G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate systems The distances from the zero point of G53 machine coordinate system are set to the controller coordinate related parameters Thus where the No 1 reference point is set in the machine is the base for the setting Il 77 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 4 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection 10 1 4 1 Workpiece coordinate system selection 6 sets G54 to G59 M system O L system O When multiple workpieces with the same shape are to be machined these commands enable the same shape to be machined by executing a single machining program in the coordinate system of each workpiece Up to 6 workpiece coordinate systems can be selected The G54 workpiece coordinate system is selected when the power is turned ON or the reset signal which cancels the modal in
247. osition NC axis up to speed Zero point initialization set completed Zero point initialization set error completed In zero point initialization Zero point initialization incomplete In current limit Current limit reached Unclamp command In position In multi step speed monitor Multi step speed monitor mode output 1 Multi step speed monitor mode output 2 Axis switching invalid status In PLC axis control In stop monitor Brake test uncompleted In brake test on the NC side In brake test on the PLC side Part System State In jog mode In handle mode In incremental mode In manual arbitrary feed mode In reference position return mode In automatic initial set mode In memory mode In MDI mode In automatic operation run In automatic operation start In automatic operation pause In reset In manual arbitrary feed In rewind Motion command completion 63 All axes in position All axes smoothing zero Manual arbitrary feed completion External search finished In rapid traverse In cutting feed In tapping In thread cutting In synchronous feed In constant surface speed In skip In reference position return F 1 digit commanded In tool life management Tool life over NC alarm 3 Program error NC alarm 4 Operation error Search 4 start error Search amp start search Illegal axis selected F 1 digit No code 1 F 1 digit No code 2 F 1 digit No code 4 Waiting between part systems In hypothetical axis comm
248. ote 3 Do not use or store C70 under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Doing so can cause an operation failure Note 4 The following environment conditions are also required for the layout design No large amount of conductible dust iron filings oil mist salt or organic solvents No direct sunlight No strong electrical or magnetic fields No direct vibrations nor shocks on C70 29 2 General Specifications 2 2 Base Unit 2 2 Base Unit INICIAN ICI AI ICI EC ws WS2 wes wee MANE a EN Trozos mazos Trozos mozos wo rezos mozos 1exoa zerzos va IO O E EI EN E A E oso 08808 0St208 0638 0658 068 06178 5 5 439 43 Application 1 Extension cable connector Connector to which the extension cables are connected for sending and receiving signals from the extension base unit Base cover Protective cover of extension cable connector Before an extension cable is connected the area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word OUT on the base cover must be removed with a tool such as nippers 3 Module connector Connector for installing the Q series power supply module CPU module I O modules and intelligent function module To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed attach the supplied c
249. ount um 2 The shape error is approx 1 9 of the conventional control Feed rate 3000mm min Radius 50mm 1 Conventional control 2 SHG control 3 SHG control FF Feed forward Roundness error um 3 Conventional control 1 Conventional control 2 SHG control SHG control 3 SHG control FF Feed forward SHG control FF 60 Positioning time ms Il 169 13 Machine Accuracy Compensation 13 2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation 13 2 2 Dual Feedback M system O L system O If the motor and machine coupling or machine system s rigidity is low ex large machine etc when using a closed loop system the response during acceleration deceleration will vibrate and cause overshooting This can cause the position loop gain from increasing The dual feedback function is effective in this case To validate the dual feedback function use position feedback with a motor side detector in ranges with high acceleration to enable stable control In ranges with low acceleration use position feedback with the machine side detector scale This will make it possible to increase the position loop gain A machine side detector scale is separately required Speed Position Position LATA command Servo command Q Position control control tor l Linear scale High frequency FB element A dead band Primary delay filter Position FB Eno Low frequency FB element Position FB Dual feedba
250. ower is not input a stop error including a reset occurs in the CPU module or the fuse is blown Ina Multiple CPU system configuration turned OFF when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules Normally OFF when loaded in an extension base unit 34 2 General Specifications 2 3 Power Supply 3 FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board 4 LG terminal Grounding for the power supply filter This terminal has potential of 1 2 of the input voltage for AC input Q61P Q64PN and Q64P This is also a protective earth terminal PE 5 Power input terminals Power input terminals connected to a power supply of 100VAC or 200VAC Q64PN and Q64P Power input terminals connected to a power supply of 24VDC Q63P Power input terminals connected to a power supply of 100 200VAC Q61P 6 Terminal screw M3 5 x 7 screw 7 Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block 8 Module fixing screw hole Used to fix the module to the base unit M3 x 12 screw user prepared Tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48 N m 9 Module loading lever Used to load the module into the base unit Note 1 Q63P is dedicated for inputting a voltage of 24VDC Q63P may break down unless connected to 24VDC for inputting or with reversed polarity Note 2 Ensure that the earth terminals LG and FG are grounded Ground resistance 100 or less Since the LG terminals have potential
251. parameters Whether the fixed cycle is complete with motion 6 or 7 can be specified by using either of the following G commands G98 Initial level return G99 R point level return These commands are modal For example once G98 is given the G98 mode is entered until G99 is given The G98 mode is entered in the initial state when the controller is ready Il 114 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions Deep hole drilling cycle G83 G87 G83 G87 When Q command is not given Z point X poin Initial point R point G99 mod 98 mode ZIX point Pa Initial point G98 mode R point G99 mode G83 2 G84 88 G85 89 Deep hole drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle C axis clamp Reverse rotation of spindle rotary tool ao C axis clamp A a f MpP O0 _ gt 2f Ny gt Z X point Z X point Initial point R point R point Initial point G98 mode 98 mode C axis unclamp C axis unclamp Forward rotation of Dwell Z X point spindle rotary tool Output or no output can be set using a paramete for the C axis clamp unclamp M code Output or no output can be set using a parameter for A j the C axis clamp unclamp M code There are two levels of hole machining axis return which apply upon completion of the fixed cycle machining operation see the figure above G98 Initial point level return G99 R point level return Il 115 12 Program Support Funct
252. pensation is made so that the half circle touches the programmed path G40 Nose R compensation cancel G41 Nose R compensation left command G42 Nose R compensation right command Compensated path Programmed path Nose R interference check In the nose radius compensation mode the program is read up to five blocks ahead including blocks with no movement and an interference check using the nose radius is conducted up to three blocks ahead in any of those blocks with movement Il 69 9 Tool Compensation 9 2 Tool Radius 9 2 4 Automatic Decision of Nose Radius Compensation Direction G46 G40 M system L system O The nose radius compensation direction is automatically determined from the tool tip and the specified movement vector G40 Nose radius compensation cancel G46 _ Nose radius compensation ON Automatic decision of compensation direction The compensation directions based on the movement vectors at the tool nose points are as follows Tool nose l Tool nose direction Tool nose point direction Tool nose point OOO KOMO 2 OOOO Op ep OOO XOXO E MONO MOCOS gt 0 0 90 Range of each So NG Range of each tool nose point tool nose point 1 to 4 E N Z N 5 to 8 JG SS DO tool nose points 5 to 8 O gt V O oO O ep O O Mouvement vectors V L O O 0 gt Cc eb ab gt gt O gt XO ELIE XOXO OOXBODOX lt
253. peration This function continuously raises and lowers the chopping axis independently of program operation when workpiece contours are to be cut There are two types of commands for the chopping function a command by the machining program and a command by a signal from the PLC Use 1323 chopsel chopping command method to select which command to use for this function a Grindstone b Chopping action c Workpiece Il 146 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 7 2 Normal line control M system A L system This function controls the swiveling of the C axis rotary axis so that the tool is always pointing in the normal line direction for movements of the axis which is selecting the plane during program operation G40 1 Normal line direction control cancel G41 1 Normal line direction control left ON G42 1 Normal line direction control right ON At the block seams the C axis turning is controlled so that the tool faces the normal line direction at the next block s start point C axis center rotation axis Tool tip position C axis swiveling During arc interpolation the C axis turning is controlled in synchronization with the operation of arc interpolation Tool tip position Il 147 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 7 3 Circular Cutting M system A L system A series of cuts is performed first the tool d
254. peration The offset compensation position and maximum compensation position are connected with a straight line following the designated compensation amount and the compensation amount to the current coordinates is obtained and compensated The compensation amount changes immediately when the offset compensation amount or maximum compensation amount changes The thermal expansion compensation is valid only between the offset compensation amount and maximum compensation position and is 0 outside of this range The compensation amount is not included in the coordinate value display Il 168 13 Machine Accuracy Compensation 13 2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation 13 2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation 13 2 1 Smooth High gain SHG Control M system O L system O This is a high response and stable position control method using the servo system MDS V SVJ3 This SHG control realizes an approximately three fold position loop gain compared to the conventional control method The features of the SHG control are as follows 1 The acceleration deceleration becomes smoother and the mechanical vibration can be suppressed approx 1 2 during acceleration deceleration In other words the acceleration deceleration time constant can be shortened Conventional control SHG control position loop gain 33rad S position loop gain 50rad S Step response Speed control Current SHG control Machine vibration Machine vibration am
255. point a Dog type Creep speed Reference position return speed When starting in same direction When starting in opposite direction as final advance direction as final advance direction b High speed type Rapid traverse rate 2 Differences according to detection method ps First return after power ON Second return and following Incremental position detection Dorne High speed Dog type method gJ tYP switching by parameter Absolute position detection method High speed High speed Il 84 10 Coordinate System 10 2 Return 10 2 2 Automatic 1st Reference Position Return M system O L system O The machine can be returned to the first reference point by assigning the G28 command during automatic operation If the interim point is commanded the machine is moved up to that point by rapid traverse so that it is positioned and then returned separately for each axis to the first reference point Alternatively by assigning the G29 command the machine can be first positioned separately for each axis at the G28 or G30 interim point and then positioned at the command position Automatic 1st reference point return Start position return The tool first returns to the interim position of the 1st reference point return start from the 1st reference point and then is positioned at the position designated in the program The G28 programming format is given below G28 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 G28 Return command Xx1 Y
256. point have been assigned it is not possible to assign commands under 1 mm min or 1 inch min To assign commands under 1 mm min or 1 inch min ensure that commands are assigned with a decimal point e The initial status after power ON can be set to asynchronous feed per minute feed by setting the Initial synchronous feed parameter to OFF e The F command increments are common to all part systems without decimal point F1 1 inch min F1 1 inch min with decimal point F1 1 inch min F1 1 inch min L system By issuing the G94 command the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F as the feed rate per minute mm min inch min Metric inout mm Least input increment B 0 001 mm C 0 0001 mm F command increment mm min 0 0001 Command range mm min 0 001 1000000 000 100000 0000 F command increment inch min without decimal point F1 1 mm min F1 1 mm min with decimal point F1 1 mm min F1 1 mm min without decimal point F1 1 inch min F1 1 inch min with decimal point F1 1 inch min F1 1 inch min e When commands without a decimal point have been assigned it is not possible to assign commands under 1 mm min or 1 inch min To assign commands under 1 mm min or 1 inch min ensure that commands are assigned with a decimal point e The initial status after power ON can be set to asynchronous feed per minute feed by setting the Initial synchronous fe
257. r Macro input 1035 PLC gt Controller Chopping override Chopping axis selection Upper dead point designation Upper dead point designation Lower dead point designation Lower dead point designation Number of cycles designation Data No To Axis Command External machine coordinate system compensation data Thermal expansion offset compensation amount Thermal expansion max compensation amount External deceleration speed selection Spindle Command Spindle command rotation speed output S command override Multi point orientation position data Classified Under Purpose CNC gt PLC PLC gt CNC PLC axis state PLC axis control Window result information 67 IT FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 Control Axes 1 1 Control Axes 1 Control Axes The NC axis spindle PLC axis are generically called the control axis The NC axis can be manually or automatically operated using the machining program The PLC axis can be controlled using the sequence program 1 1 Control Axes 1 1 1 Number of Basic Control Axes NC axes M system 3 axes L system 2 axes 1 1 2 Max Number of Axes NC axes Spindles PLC axes M system 16 axes L system 16 axes A number of axes that are within the maximum number of control axes and that does not exceed the maximum number given for the NC axis spindle and PLC axis can be used For example if 16 NC axes are used this alone is the maximum number of control axes
258. ram commands the Xp Yp plane is selected by G17 and the arc command is controlled on the X Y plane by this command Il 82 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 10 Origin Set Origin Cancel M system O L system O Using the CNC monitor the coordinate system current position and workpiece coordinate position can be set to 0 by screen operations This function is the same as the coordinate system setting command G92 XO YO or ZO POSITION WORK G54 X 150 345 POSOTION X 150 345 x a 0 000 Y 12 212 Y 12 212 Z 1 000 A 0 000 WORK G54 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 A 0 000 0 000 Z 1 000 0 000 A 0 000 0 000 pressing Y and z keys When axes are set to 0 in order the Y and Z axis can be set by pressing key successively without 10 1 11 Counter Set M system O L system O 1 This operation is the same as the operation of Origin Set but press key instead of key 2 Using CNC monitor the position counter display can be changed to 0 by screen operations Only the POSITION counter display is changed to 0 and the other coordinate system counter displays are not changed Il 83 10 Coordinate System 10 2 Return 10 2 Return 10 2 1 Manual Reference Position Return M system O L system O This function enables the tool to be returned manually to the machine s default position reference position 1 Return pattern to reference
259. re Internal response time 0 08ms or less Note NC recognizes input signals of 2ms or more as the valid skip signals If machine contacts relay etc are used malfunctions will occur due to chattering Use semiconductor contacts transistor etc 47 2 General Specifications 2 6 Battery Box for CNC CPU Q173NCCPU 2 6 Battery Box for CNC CPU Q173NCCPU Set the battery Q6BAT in the battery holder unit Q173NCBATC Dimension 2 65 3 M5x14 Life time of the battery Life time of the battery Q6BAT Power on Guaranteed Actual time ratio value 2 service value 75C 40C Q173NCCPU 0 20 000hr CNC CPU module type Backup time after alarm 27 000hr tonal A r after 31 000hr 43 800hr or SM52 ON 100 43 800hr 1 The power on time ratio indicates the ratio of C70 power on time to one day 24 hours When the total power on time is 12 hours and the total power off time is 12 hours the power on time ratio is 50 2 The guaranteed value equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the characteristics value of the memory SRAM supplied by the manufacturer and under the storage ambient temperature range of 25 to 75 operating ambient temperature of O to 55 3 The actual service value equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on the measured value and under the storage ambient temperature of 40 This value
260. rection while intermediate path is being calculated automatically The machining program is commanded as follows G72 Wd Re G72 AaPpQqUu Ww FfSsTt Wd Cut depth d When P Q command is not given Modal Re Retract amount e Modal Aa Finish shape program No If it is omitted the program being executed is assumed to be designated Finish shape start sequence No If it is omitted the program top is assumed to be designated Finish shape end sequence No If it is omitted the program end is assumed to be designated However if M99 precedes the Q command up to M99 Finishing allowance in the X axis direction Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction When P Q command is given Cutting feed rate F S and T command in the finish shape program are Spindle speed ignored and the value in the rough cutting command or Tool command the preceding value becomes effective d Cut depth Y lt Cycle commanded point Details of retrace operation Finishing allowance Il 127 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 3 Molding material in rough cutting cycle G73 The finish shape program is called Intermediate path is automatically calculated and rough cutting is performed conforming to the finish shape The machining program is commanded as follows G73 Ui Wk Rd G73 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt Ui Cutting allowance in the X axis direction e Cuttin
261. rface Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network SH NA 080049 Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network Gl optical cable Double loop QJ71LP21G PLC to PLC network control normal station Remote I O net remote master station SH NA 080124 For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual IB NA 66690 Q corresponding Gl optical cable Double loop e T REINAR SARSAR Remote l O net remote I O station eysteUnclelenee Manual Remote I O network SH NA 080124 13 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules c Coaxial interface Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network SH NA 080049 Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network SH NA 080124 For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual IB NA 66690 Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network SH NA 080124 3C 2V 5C 2V coaxial cable Single bus QJ71BR11 PLC to PLC network control normal station Remote I O net remote master station 3C 2V 5C 2V coaxial cable Single bus QJ72BR15 Remote I O net remote I O station 18 CC Link CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual SH NA 080394E For master local station For QCPU Compatible with CC Link Ver 2 QJ61BT11N 19 CC Link IE controller network C
262. ring NC operation servo drive unit motor and encoder Spindle alarm This alarm describes errors in the spindle system such as the spindle drive unit motor and encoder MCP alarm An error has occurred in the drive unit and other interfaces System alarm This alarm is displayed with the register at the time when the error occurred on the screen if the system stops due to a system error Absolute position detection An alarm in the absolute position detection system is displayed system alarm Program error This alarm occur during automatic operation and the cause of this alarm is mainly program errors which occur for instance when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared Il 182 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 2 Display for Ensuring Safety 15 2 3 Operation Stop Cause M system O L system O The stop cause of automatic operation is shown on the display 15 2 4 Emergency Stop Cause M system O L system O When the EMG emergency stop message is displayed in the operation status area of the setting and display unit the cause of the emergency stop can be confirmed 15 2 5 Thermal Detection M system O L system O When overheating is detected in the control unit or the CNC CPU module an alarm is displayed and the temperature rise signal is output at the same time If the system is in auto run at the time run is c
263. rom 0 001 to 99999 999 seconds The input command increment for the dwell time depends on the parameter 2 L system G94 G04 Xx1 Uu1 or G04 Ppi G94 Asynchronous G04 l Dwell Xx1 Uu1 Poi Dwell time The time based dwell can be designated in the range from 0 001 to 99999 999 seconds The input command increment for the dwell time depends on the parameter Il 41 5 Program Memory Editing 5 1 Memory Capacity 5 Program Memory Editing 5 1 Memory Capacity Machining programs are stored in the CNC memory 5 1 1 Memory Capacity Number of Programs Stored Note 1 The tape length will be the total of two part systems when using the 2 part system specifications 5 1 1 1 15KB 40m 64 programs M system O L system O 5 1 1 2 30KB 80m 128 programs M system A L system A 5 1 1 3 60KB 160m 200 programs M system A L system A 5 1 1 4 125KB 320m 200 programs M system A L system A 5 1 1 5 230KB 600m 400 programs M system A L system A 5 1 1 6 500KB 1280m 1000 programs M system A L system A 5 1 1 7 1000kB 2560m 1000 programs M system A L system A 5 1 1 8 2000kB 5120m 1000 programs M system A L system A Il 42 5 Program Memory Editing 5 2 Editing 5 2 Editing 5 2 1 Program Editing M system O L system O The following editing functions are possible 1 Program erasing a Machining programs can be erased individually or totally b
264. rrespondence between the G code which performs macro call and the program number for the macro to be called is set by a parameter Up to 10 codes from GOO to G255 can be used for this command Whether to use codes such as G00 G01 or G02 which have already been clearly assigned for specific applications by the EIA standards as macro codes can be changed over using a parameter b Macro call using miscellaneous commands M S T B code macro call Simply by designating an M or S T B code it is possible to call user macro programs with the prescribed program number Entered M codes and all S T and B codes can be used Format Mm or Ss Tt Bb Mm Ss Tt Bb M or S T B code for performing macro call The correspondence between the Mm code which performs macro call and the program number for the macro to be called is set by a parameter Up to 10 M codes from MOO to M95 can be entered select codes to be entered which are not the codes basically required by the machine and which are not M codes MO M1 M2 M30 and M96 through M99 Note 1 G commands in G code macro programs are not subject to macro calls but normal G commands M commands in M code macro programs are not subject to macro calls but normal M commands The same applies to S T and B codes Note 2 The registration of the program number used for calling the G code macro or M code macro can be done independently for each system M system Il 103 12
265. rse feed rate of the NC refer to the section entitled Rapid Traverse Rate Since the actual rapid traverse feed rate depends on the machine refer to the specifications of the machine concerned Positioning to the final point is shown below when this positioning is in the direction Example G60 G91 X100 Y100 1 The rapid traverse rate for each axis is the interim point value set with parameters as the GOO 7 speed 2 The vector speed to the interim point is the value produced by combining the distance Y100 and respective speeds 3 The creep distance of the distance between the interim and end points can be Current position set independently for each axis by parameters End point Note 1 The processing of the above pattern will be followed even for the machine lock and Z axis command cancel Note 2 On the creep distance the tool is moved with rapid traverse Note 3 G60 is valid even for positioning in drilling in the fixed cycle Note 4 When the mirror image function is on the tool will be moved in the reverse direction by mirror image as far as the interim position but operation over the creep distance with the final advance will not be affected by the mirror image Il 11 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation 3 2 1 Linear Interpolation M system O L system O 3 2 Linear Circular Interpolation Linear interpolation is a function that moves a tool linearly by
266. s 3 USB USB connector for the connection of a tool 4 RS232 RS 232C connector for the connection of a tool 5 BAT Battery Life time of the battery Frequency of battery Power ON Guaranteed Actual ser time ratio 2 value 3 vice valuet4 Backup time after meee o o alarm 5 707 40 30 100hr 43 800hr 600hr 30 43 000hr 43 800hr 600hr 50 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 100 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 0 25 300hr 43 800hr 600hr 36 100hr 43 800hr 600hr PLC CPU module type QO3UD E CPU 0 30 100hr 43 800hr 600hr 30 43 000hr 43 800hr 600hr 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 70 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 100 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 4 300hr 32 100hr 384hr 30 6 100hr 43 800hr 384hr 50 8 600hr 43 800hr 384hr 14 300hr 43 800hr 384hr 100 43 800hr 43 800hr 384hr QO4UD E HCPU 2 50 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 100 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 37 2 General Specifications 2 4 PLC CPU Life time of the battery Frequency of battery Power ON Guaranteed Actual ser time ratio 2 value 3 vice value 4 Backup time after usage 4 o o alarm 5 70 40 C 25 300hr 43 800hr 600hr 1 PLC CPU module type 30 36 100hr 43 800hr 600hr 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 100 43 800hr 43 800hr 600hr 4 200hr 32 100hr 384hr 6 000hr 43 800hr 384hr QO6UD E HCPU 2 8 400hr 43 800hr 384hr 14 000hr 43 800hr 384hr 100 43 800hr 43 800hr 3
267. s M system A L system Up to 100 tools regardless of the number of part systems Il 179 14 Automation Support Functions 14 3 Others 14 3 Others 14 3 1 Programmable Current Limitation M system O L system O This function allows the current limit value of the servo axis to be changed to the desired value in the program and is used for the workpiece stopper etc The commanded current limit value is designated with a ratio of the limit current to the rated current The current limit value can also be set from the window function and setting and display unit The validity of the current limit can be selected with the external signal input However the current limit value of the PLC axis cannot be rewritten G10 L14 X dn L14 Current limit value setting side side X Axis address dn Current limit value 1 to 300 1 Ifthe current limit is reached when the current limit is valid the current limit reached signal is output 2 The following two modes can be used with external signals as the operation after the current limit is reached e Normal mode The movement command is executed in the current state During automatic operation the movement command is executed to the end and then the next block is moved to with the droops still accumulated e Interlock mode The movement command is blocked internal interlock During automatic operation the operation stops at the corresponding block and the next bl
268. s between synchronous asynchronous in G84 G88 Il 113 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions The drilling cycle motions generally are classified into the following seven Motion 1 Motion 1 Initial point Motion 3 Motion 7 R point Motion 6 Motion 1 Motion 2 Motion 3 Motion 4 Motion 5 Motion 6 Motion 7 Rapid positioning up to the initial point of X Z and C axes If the positioning axis in position width is designated the in position check is conducted upon completion of the block Output if the C axis clamp M code is given Rapid positioning up to the R point Hole machining at cutting feed If the drilling axis in position width is designated the in position check is conducted upon completion of the block However in the case of deep hole drilling cycles 1 and 2 the in position check is not conducted with the drilling of any holes except the last one The in position check is conducted at the commanded hole bottom position last hole drilling Motion at the hole bottom position It varies depending on the fixed cycle mode Spindle CCW M04 spindle CW M03 dwell etc are included Return to the R point Return to the initial point at rapid traverse feed Operations 6 and 5 may be conducted as a single operation depending on the fixed cycle mode Note 1 With a synchronous tap command the in position check is conducted in accordance with the
269. s machining programs for adjustment Automatically adjusts the notch filter when the initial resonance is large Automatically adjusts the notch filter and the speed loop gain Automatically adjusts the acceleration deceleration time constant Automatically adjusts the position loop gain Automatically adjusts the quadrant protrusion amount of the designated axis Automatically adjusts the lost motion type 3 for the quadrant protrusion amount of the designated axis Sets the path to communicate with NC The model of connected NC is selected Saves changes the servo parameters Il 199 15 Safety and Maintenance 15 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 4 13 Parameter Setting Tool 15 4 13 1 NC Configurator2 M system O L system O The NC data file necessary for NC control and machine operation such as parameters tool data and common variables can be edited on a personal computer Please contact us to purchase a full function version A limited function version is also available free of charge 15 4 102 Backup M system O L system O This function saves backs up the screen data and each controller PLC CNC data to a memory card or a USB memory lt also reloads restores that data to each device If this function is used the backup is unnecessary for the MONITOR screen and each controller and work improves Il 200 16 Drive System 16 1 Servo Spindle 16 Drive System CNC dedicated products are used as
270. s to apply to the movement up to the interim point can be selected using a parameter Non interpolation applies for movement from the interim point to each of the reference points Note 6 The machine will not stop at the interim point even when a single block is selected Il 87 10 Coordinate System 10 2 Return 10 2 4 Reference Position Check M system O L system O By commanding G27 a machining program which has been prepared so that the tool starts off from the reference point and returns to the reference point can be checked to see whether the tool will return properly to the reference point The G27 programming format is given below G27 Xx1 Yyi Zz1 Ppl G27 Verification command Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Return control axes Ppt Verification No P1 1st reference point verification P2 2nd reference point verification P3 3rd reference point verification P4 4th reference point verification The assigned axis is first positioned by rapid traverse to the commanded position and then if this is the reference point the reference point arrival signal is output When the address P is omitted the first reference point verification will be applied Note 1 The number of axes for which reference point verification can be performed simultaneously depends on the number of simultaneously controlled axes Note 2 An alarm results unless the tool is positioned at the reference point upon completion of the command Note 3
271. s to be moved from point P1 to point P2 X command Ucommand Remarks Diameter Radius Diameter Even when a diameter command has been selected only the U X r X 2r U r gt U 2r gt command can be made a radius command by parameter Radius and diameter commands Il 9 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 1 Positioning 3 Positioning Interpolation 3 1 Positioning 3 1 1 Positioning M system O L system O This function carries out positioning at high speed using a rapid traverse rate with the movement command value given in the program GOO Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Also possible for additional axes A B C U V W simultaneously x1 y1 z1 numerical values denoting the position data The above command positions the tool by rapid traverse The tool path takes the shortest distance to the end point in the form of a straight line For details on the rapid traverse feed rate of the NC refer to the section entitled Rapid Traverse Rate Since the actual rapid traverse feed rate depends on the machine refer to the specifications of the machine concerned 1 The rapid traverse feed rate for each axis can be set independently with parameters 2 The number of axes which can be driven simultaneously depends on the specifications number of simultaneously controlled axes The axes can be used in any combination within this range 3 The feed rate is controlled within the range that it does not exceed the rapid traverse rate of
272. set amount and 3 Parameters Unit system Length data Meaning Metric unit system inch unit system Note 1 For the angle data 1 0 means 1 degree regardless of the unit system i ry Machining program ula Parameter Parameter Offset amount etc Inch unit system Metric unit svstem Metric unit system Not affected Ter unie e Inch unit system G21 Metric unit system y Metric unit system Not affected Not affected y Inch unit system Note 1 The parameter changeover is valid after the power is turned ON again Note 2 Even if parameter l_inch is changed the screen data offset amount etc will not be automatically converted Note 3 When the power is turned ON or resetting is performed the status of the G20 G21 modal depends on the _ G20 parameter setting Il 4 2 Input Command 2 3 Program Format 2 3 Program Format 2 3 1 Program Format This is G code program format The G code of lathe system is selected by parameter This specification manual explains the G function with G code series 3 as standard 2 3 1 1 Format 1 for Lathe M system L system O 2 3 1 2 Format 2 for Lathe M system L system O 2 3 1 4 Format 1 for Machining Center M system O L system Il 5 2 Input Command 2 4 Command Value 2 4 Command Value 2 4 1 Decimal Point Input I Il M system O L system O There are two types of the decimal point input commands and they can be sel
273. sis M system O L system O The following operations related to CNC diagnosis can be carried out on the Diagnosis screen ISGESHS Display of hardware software and drive unit configuration Operation monitor of servo and spindle drive unit Diagnosis of NC input output signal interface diagnosis Display of operation history Display of alarm stop code history list Data sampling for maintenance Deleting copying and list displaying of machining program 6 3 8 Additional Languages 6 3 8 1 Japanese M system O L system O 6 3 8 2 English M system O L system O 6 3 8 3 German M system A L system A 6 3 8 4 Italian M system A L system A 6 3 8 5 French M system A L system A 6 3 8 6 Spanish M system A L system A Il 49 6 Operation and Display 6 3 Display Methods and Contents CNC Monitor Function 6 3 8 7 Chinese 6 3 8 7 2 Simplified Chinese Characters M system A L system A 6 3 8 14 Polish M system A Lsystem A Il 50 7 Input Output Functions and Devices 7 1 Input Output Data 7 Input Output Functions and Devices 7 1 Input Output Data CNC data input output function of GOT Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal is used Various data of CNC can be input output for a memory card or a USB memory which is attached to GOT 7 1 1 Machining Program Input Output M system O L system O 7 1 2 Tool Offset Data Input Output M system O L system O 7 1 3 Common Variable Inp
274. so a spindle and PLC axis cannot be connected 1 1 2 1 Max Number of NC axes In Total for All the Part Systems M system 16 axes L system 16 axes 1 1 2 2 Max Number of Spindles M system 7 axes L system 4 axes 1 1 2 3 Max Number of PLC axes M system 8 axes L system 8 axes 1 1 4 Max Number of PLC Indexing Axes M system 8 axes L system 8 axes 1 1 5 Number of Simultaneous Contouring Control Axes Simultaneous control of up to four axes or less is possible in the same part system However for actual use the machine tool builder specification will apply M system 4 axes L system 4 axes 1 1 6 Max Number of NC Axes in a Part System M system 8 axes L system 8 axes Listed are the maximum number of axes which can be controlled in a part system For actual use the machine tool builder specification will apply Il 1 1 Control Axes 1 2 Control Part System 1 2 Control Part System 1 2 1 Standard Number of Part Systems M system 1 part system L system 1 part system The standard number of part systems Is one 1 2 2 Max Number of Part Systems M system A7 part systems L system A3 part systems The maximum number of part systems for lathe system is three and for machining center is seven For actual use the machine tool builder specification will apply 1 3 Control Axes and Operation Modes 1 3 2 Memory Mode M system O L system O The machining programs stored in the memory of the CNC unit
275. specifications 6 2 5 Displayed Part System Switch M system O L system O The part system displayed on the screen can be changed with the keys The number of displayed part systems is counted by one each time the keys are pressed The screen corresponding to that part system opens If the number of displayed part systems exceeds the valid number of part systems the number of displayed part systems will return to 1 6 2 10 Screen Saver Backlight OFF M system O L system O The GOT s screensaver function protects the display by turning the backlight OFF after the preset time has elapsed 6 2 15 Screen Capture M system O L system O The GOT s hard copy function captures the screen image in JPEG or bitmap format Il 46 6 Operation and Display 6 3 Display Methods and Contents CNC Monitor Function 6 2 101 CNC Machining Programing Editing M system O L system O This function is to produce edit CNC machining programs on GOT monitor Machining program Fixed cycle program and MDI program are applicable Il 47 6 Operation and Display 6 3 Display Methods and Contents CNC Monitor Function 6 3 Display Methods and Contents CNC Monitor Function 6 3 1 Status Display M system O L system O The status of the program currently being executed is indicated 1 Display of G S T M commands and 2nd miscellaneous command modal values 2 Feed rate display 3 Tool offset number and offset amount di
276. splay 4 Real speed display Note 1 Note 1 The feed rate of each axis is converted from the final speed output to the drive unit and is displayed However during follow up the speed is converted and displayed with the signals from the detector installed on the servomotor 6 3 2 Clock Display M system O L system O The clock is built in and the date year month date and time hour minutes seconds are displayed Once the time is set it can be seen as a clock on the screen 6 3 3 Position Display M system O L system O Various information related to operation such as the axis counter speed display and MSTB command are displayed on the Position Display screen The following operations regarding operation can be executed 1 Operation search 2 Setting of common variables 3 Setting of local variables 4 Counter zero 5 Origin zero 6 Manual numeric command etc 6 3 4 Tool Compensation Parameter M system O L system O Tool workpiece related settings user parameter settings manual numeric command issuing and tool length measurements can be carried out on the Tool Compensation Parameter screen II 48 6 Operation and Display 6 3 Display Methods and Contents CNC Monitor Function 6 3 5 Program M system O L system O Machining program searching creating and editing addition deletion change program list display and MDI editing can be carried out on the Program screen 6 3 6 Alarm Diagno
277. system Once the G76 1 command exists in both part systems the thread cutting cycle is started GOO X_Z_ G76 1 AENA a EAN G00 ZE 2 G76 1 Command for part system 1 Command for part system 2 Il 154 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 2 2 part system synchronous thread cutting cycle II Command format Thread cutting command waits for 1 revolution synchronizing signal of the spindle encoder and starts moving The start point can be delayed by thread cutting start angle The address except A has the same meanings as those in 2 part system synchronous thread cutting cycle l lf G76 2 command is given in part system 1 or 2 a wait is made until G76 2 command is given in the other part system Once the G76 2 command exists in both part systems the thread cutting cycle is started l l GOO X_Z_ G76 AER SIA Goo X Z In the G76 2 cycle the same screw is assumed to be cut and it is cut deeply according to alternate cut depth in part systems 1 and 2 Command according to part system 1 Simultaneously machine on screw with both part systems MIS according to part system 2 11 1 Ane 1 1 Cut by part system 1 1 a Me RET 2 Cut by part system 2 Finishing allowance d Il 155 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 12 1 9 Data Input by Program 12 1 9 1 Parameter Input by Program M system A L system A
278. t 100 240VAC built in flash memory 15MB GT16 General Description 8 4 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots IB NA 0800434E TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1665M STBD wide angle view 65536 colors lt Multi media and video RGB supported gt 24VDC built in flash memory 15MB 2 Option function board GT16 MES Interface Function GT16 MESB For MES interface function Board User s Manual IB NA 0800427E 3 CF card modeiname Remas O eterenes GTO5 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 512MC Flash ROM 512MB Memory Card Adaptor User s GT05 MEM 1GC Flash ROM 1GB Manual IB 800302 GT05 MEM 2GC Flash ROM 2GB 4 Protection sheet Mogeimame Remas Sd Poeme STIEIPSES en OB NA 0800426E STIGSOPSCE 25 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 1 3 2 3 GT15 1 GOT a GT1595 15 0 type XGA 1024x768 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1595 XTBA wide angle view 65536 colors 100 240VAC built in flash memory 9MB Note Out of production GT15 General Description 15 0 type XGA 1024x768 dots IB NA 0800322E TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1595 XTBD wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC built in flash memory 9MB Note Out of production b GT1585 12 1 type SVGA 800x600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and GT1585V STBA wide angle view 65536 colors lt Video RGB supported gt 100 240VAC
279. t 16 points 12 24VDC 1 0A transistor output Manual SH 4007 source type 2 wire super slim waterproof type 21 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 1 3 2 GOT 1 3 2 1 GT27 1 GOT a GT2712 12 1 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display 65536 colors lt Multimedia and video RGB and multi touch supported gt GT2712 STBA 100 240VAC user memory memory for storage ROM 57MB operation memory RAM 128MB Requiring GT Designer3 Version1 GOT2000 sy 4 117 or later GT27 General Description IB 0800502 12 1 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display 65536 colors lt Multimedia and video RGB and multi touch supported gt ARNES 24VDC user memory storage memory ROM 57MB operation memory RAM 128MB Requiring GT Designer3 Version1 GOT2000 1 117X or later b GT2710 10 4 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display 65536 colors lt Multimedia and video RGB and multi touch supported gt GT2710 STBA 100 240VAC user memory memory for storage ROM 57MB operation memory RAM 128MB Requiring GT Designer3 Version1 GOT2000 1 117X or later GT27 General Description IB 10 4 type SVGA 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid 9800502 crystal display 65536 colors lt Multimedia and video RGB and multi touch supported gt GT2710 STBD 24VDC user memory memory for storage ROM 57MB operation memory RAM 128MB Requiring GT Designer3 Version1 GOT
280. t a decimal point have been assigned it is not possible to assign commands under 1 mm min or 1 inch min e The initial status after power ON can be set to asynchronous feed per minute feed by setting the Initial synchronous feed parameter to OFF II 25 4 Feed 4 2 Feed Rate Input Methods 4 2 4 F1 digit Feed M system O L system O When the Fidigt parameter is ON the feed rate registered by parameter in advance can be assigned by designating a single digit following address F There are six F codes FO and F1 to F5 The rapid traverse rate is applied when FO is issued which is the same as the GOO command When one of the codes F1 to F5 is issued the cutting feed rate set to support the code serves as the valid rate command When a command higher than F5 is issued it serves as a regular direct command with feed rate value of 5 digits following address F When an F1 digit command has been issued the In F1 digit external output signal is output Il 26 4 Feed 4 3 Override 4 3 Override 4 3 1 Rapid Traverse Override M system O L system O 1 Code method Four levels of override 1 25 50 and 100 can be applied to manual or automatic rapid traverse using the external input signal supplied Code method commands are assigned as combinations of bit signals from the PLC 2 Value setting method Override can be applied in 1 steps from 0 to 100 to manual or automatic rapid traverse using the external inpu
281. t amount The tool length offset amount tool radius compensation amount nose radius compensation amount nose radius imaginary tool tip point or tool width can be set as the shape offset amount The compensation amount that can be set and used differs depending on whether offset amount setting type 1 2 or 3 Is used 2 Wear offset amount When the tip of the tool used has become worn the wear offset amount is used to offset this wear Types of wear offset amounts include the tool length wear offset amount tool radius wear compensation amount and nose radius wear compensation amount The wear offset amount can be used with offset amount setting types 2 and 3 and it is added to the shape offset amount for compensation a Type 1 1 axis offset amount M system This is the value that is used by rotary tools As the tool length offset amount among the offset amounts for the position of the tool moving in the direction parallel to the control axis the offset amount in the longitudinal direction of the rotary tool is registered The tool length offset amount is set as a minus value As the tool radius compensation amount among the offset amounts for the position of the tool moving in the direction parallel to the control axis the offset amount in the radial direction of the rotary tool is registered The tool radius compensation amount is set as a plus value One offset amount data is registered in one offset number and the offset Nos are assign
282. t amount is to be retained and automatic operation is to be continued is determined by setting manual absolute mode ON or OFF refer to 11 4 8 Manual Absolute Mode ON OFF 11 4 2 Automatic Operation Handle Interruption M system O L system O The handle command can interrupt and be superimposed onto a command without suspending automatic operation and the machine can be moved by rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation If the spindle load is greatly exceeded when cutting a workpiece as per the machining program due to a high rough cutting amount in face machining for instance automatic handle interrupt makes it possible to raise the Z surface and reduce the load easily without suspending feed in the automatic operation mode Automatic handle interrupt is conducted by setting the automatic handle interrupt valid switch which is provided separately from the manual operation mode The axis selection and pulse scale factor operation are conducted as for manual handle feed Whether after an interrupt to return to the path of the machining program by automatic operation or remain offset by the amount equivalent to the interrupt amount is determined using a parameter Tool x Y z O D lt gt Interrupt 10 1 100 Workpiece Handle feed Automatic feed e i Feed path with automatic feed and handle feed superimposed Il 95 11 Operation Support Functions 11 4 Interrupt Operation 11 4 3 Manu
283. t for pulse generators 100mA HA1 HB1 HB1 HA1 Yo c d e gt lt gt lt 5VDC HA1 SG 0V 2 5 CNC CPU Module L FG 90 phase difference between HA1 and HB1 H level 3 5V to 5 25V L level OV to 0 5V a b c d e HA1 or HB1 rising edge falling edge phase difference T 4 T 10 T Hai or HB1 phase cycle Min 10 ws 11 BAT Connector for battery 4 IN FG a A i IN BAT IN BAT 53426 0410 MOLEX 12 Service Connector for MITSUBISHI s servicing Do not connect any object lt damages NC unit or PC 46 2 General Specifications 13 EXT I F 2 5 CNC CPU Module Connector for the expansion connection of skip signal 5V manual pulse generator 26 Hour sv A oUT 5V out sev Reserve 11 PA out scov EN Reserve PY Reserve ES ouT saov EN Reserve WA ouT saov __ 18 HA3 EN in HAZ AM IN HAI a Reserve YA Reserve I IN_ SKIPCOM YIN SKIP1 AM IN SKIP3 AM OUT 5V Ay OUT 5w FJ OUT SGOV ABOUT 30 Reserve 36 EA OUT sav EN Reserve NY Reserve 0 ouT saov __ S Reserve FEA OUT SG OV __ 43 HB3 YA in HB2 WA IN Hei WA Reserve EA Reserve _ EH IN_ SKIPCOM WI IN SKIP2 JA in skiP4 25 50 HDR EC5OLFDT1 SDL HO
284. t signal supplied Note 1 Code method and value setting method can be selected by PLC processing 4 3 2 Cutting Feed Override M system O L system O 1 Code method Override can be applied in 10 steps from 0 to 300 to the feed rate command designated in the machining program using the external input signal supplied Code method commands are assigned as combinations of bit signals from the PLC 2 Value setting method Override can be applied in 1 steps from 0 to 327 to the feed rate command designated in the machining program using the external input signal supplied 4 3 3 2nd Cutting Feed Override M system O L system O Override can be further applied in 0 01 steps from 0 to 327 67 as a second stage override to the feed rate after the cutting feed override has been applied 4 3 4 Override Cancel M system O L system O By turning on the override cancel external signal the override is automatically set to 100 for the cutting feed during automatic operation mode memory and MDI Note 1 The override cancel signal is not valid for manual operation Note 2 When the cutting feed override or second cutting feed override is 0 the 0 override takes precedence and the override is not canceled Note 3 The override cancel signal is not valid for rapid traverse Il 27 4 Feed 4 4 Acceleration Deceleration 4 4 Acceleration Deceleration 4 4 1 Automatic Acceleration Deceleration after Interpolation M system O L sys
285. ted by specifying the center coordinates or radius of the first circular arc and the end point absolute coordinates and center coordinates or radius of the second circular arc Example 111 Kk1 Ff Xxc Zzx li2Kk2 Ff2 lit Kk1 Ff1 Xxc ZZC Rr2 Ff2 Rr Ff1 a Xxc ZzC li2 and K are circular center coordinate incremental values distances from the start point in the first block or distances from the end point in the second block P and Q commands X Z absolute center coordinates of circular arc can be given instead of and K commands 2 Automatic calculation of linear arc intersection When it is difficult to find the intersections of a given line and circular arc the intersections are automatically calculated by programming the following blocks Example G18 G01 Aali Ffi G02 Xxc Zzc li2 Kk2 Hh2 Ff2 p2 q2 A C xC ZC landK Incrimental coordinates from circular end point P and Q Absolute center coordinates of circular arc H 0 Intersection with shoter line H 1 Intersection with longer line II 143 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 3 Automatic calculation of arc linear intersection When it is difficult to find the intersections of a given circular arc and line the intersections are automatically calculated by programming the following blocks Example G18 G03 lii Kki Hhi Ffi G01 Xxc Zzc Aali Ff2 landK Incrimental coordinates from circular end
286. tem O Acceleration deceleration is applied to all commands automatically The acceleration deceleration patterns are linear acceleration deceleration soft acceleration deceleration exponent function acceleration deceleration exponent function acceleration linear deceleration and any other that can be selected using a parameter For rapid traverse feed or manual feed acceleration deceleration is always made for each block and the time constant can be set for each axis separately Linear acceleration deceleration Soft Exponential Exponential acceleration linear acceleration deceleration acceleration deceleration deceleration Note 1 The rapid traverse feed acceleration deceleration patterns are effective for the following G00 G27 G28 G29 G30 rapid traverse feed in manual run JOG incremental feed return to reference position Note 2 Acceleration deceleration in handle feed mode is usually performed according to the acceleration deceleration pattern for cutting feed However a parameter can be specified to select a pattern with no acceleration deceleration step Il 28 4 Feed 4 4 Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration Deceleration during Continuing Blocks 1 Continuous G1 blocks The tool does not decelerate between blocks Tsc Gi Tsc Gi 2 Continuous G1 GO blocks If the GO command direction is the same as that for G1 whether G1 is to be decelerated is selected using a parameter If no decel
287. tem under which the CNC unit switches the coils automatically in accordance with the motor speed 8 1 2 S Code Output M system O L system O When an 8 digit number following address S S 99999999 to S99999999 is commanded a signed 32 bit binary data and start signal will be output to the PLC One set of S commands can be issued in one block Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all S commands S function can be designated with any other kind of commands In the case where a movement command is in the same block two different command sequences are available Depending on user PLC process presence of DEN signal process either one of the following two will be applied 1 S function is executed after the movement is completed 2 S function is executed at the same time as when the movement command is issued Note The display of S command is five digits or less display on some screens Il 53 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 3 Constant Surface Speed Control M system A L system A With radial direction cutting this function enables the spindle speed to be changed in accordance with changes in the radial direction coordinate values and the workpiece to be cut with the cutting point always kept at a constant speed constant surface circumferential speed Gcode Function G97 Constant surface speed cancel The surface speed is commande
288. the speed when the usual speed is too fast in a situation such as carrying out machining with the door open Il 59 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 2 Tool Functions T 8 2 Tool Functions T 8 2 1 Tool Functions T Command M system O L system O This function commands the tool No by an 8 digit number that follows address T TO to 199999999 Tool compensation No tool length compensation and or tool nose wear compensation will be displayed for L system 1 M system When an 8 digit number following address T 100000000 199999999 is assigned 8 digit code data and start signal will be output to PLC Only one set of T commands can be commanded in a block Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all T commands Note 1 There are some screens in the setting and display unit that cannot display all eight digits 2 Lsystem The command is issued with an 8 digit number following address T TO 199999999 The high order 6 digits or 7 digits are designated as the tool No and the low order 2 digits or 1 digit are designated as the offset No Which method is to be used is designated with parameters TXXXXXXXX Tool offset No Tool No TXXXXXXXX Tool offset No Tool No The 6 digit or 7 digit tool No code data and start signal will be output to the PLC Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all T commands Note 1 There are some scr
289. the movement command value supplied in the program at the cutting feed rate designated by the F code G01 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff1 Also possible for additional axes A B C U V W simultaneously numerical values denoting the position data numerical value denoting the feed rate data Linear interpolation is executed by the above command at the f1 feed rate The tool path takes the shortest distance to the end point in the form of a straight line For details on the f1 command values for NC refer to the section entitled Cutting Feed Rate Since the actual cutting feed rate depends on the machine refer to the specifications of the machine concerned Example GO1 G91 X100 Y100 F120 Y End point Feed rate 120mm min 100 85mm min Current 190 85mm min position x 1 2 The cutting feed rate command moves the tool in the vector direction The component speeds of each axis are determined by the proportion of respective command values to the actual movement distance with linear interpolation 1 The number of axes which can be driven simultaneously depends on the specifications number of simultaneously controlled axes The axes can be used in any combination within this range 2 The feed rate is controlled so that it does not exceed the cutting feed rate clamp of each axis 3 When a rotary axis has been commanded in the same block it is treated as a linear axis in degree units 1 1mm and
290. the subsequent S command S is to apply Command format G43 1 Selected spindle control mode ON the selected spindle number is set using a parameter G44 1 Second spindle control mode ON 2 Spindle control commands using an extended word address SO In addition to using the S S commands it is also possible to assign commands which differentiate the applicable spindle among the first through seventh spindles by using the SO The S command can be issued from a machining program for any part system The number of spindle axes differs according to the model so check the specifications The C6 T and L System and C64 T System cannot control multiple spindles in one part system Command format SO O Number assigned as the spindle number 1 first spindle 2 second spindle gt 7 seventh spindle variables can be designated Rotational speed or surface speed value assigned by 6 digit analog command variables can be designated kkkkkk Il 56 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 6 Spindle Orientation M system O L system O This function stops the spindle rotation at a certain position 1 Orientation This function stops the spindle rotation at a certain position when using the digital spindle When the orientation command is used the spindle will rotate several times and then stop at the orientation point The orientation point is th
291. thread lead ranges M system Metric command Least input Least input increment F mm rev E mm rev increment F inch rev E inch rev mm inch 0 001 0 00001 0 0001 0 000001 oe to 999 999 to 999 99999 aden to 39 3700 to 39 370078 0 0001 0 000001 0 00001 0 000001 oo to 99 9999 to 99 999999 ee to 3 93700 to 3 937007 L system Metric command Least input Least input increment F mm rev E mm rev increment F inch rev E inch rev mm inch 0 001 0 0001 0 00001 0 0004 0 000001 0 000010 i to 999 9999 to 999 99999 l to 99 999999 to 9 9999999 0 00001 0 000001 0 0000001 0 00000001 io to 99 99999 to 99 999999 eau to 9 9999999 to 0 99999999 The direction of the axis with a large movement serves as the reference for the lead Il 32 4 Feed 2 4 5 Thread Cutting Thread number designation Inch threads are cut by designating the number of threads per inch with the E address Whether the E command is a thread number designation or lead designation is selected with the parameters G33 Zz1 Ww1i Xx1 Uui1 Qqi_ Eel G33 Thread cutting command Zz1 Ww1 Xx1 Uu1 Thread end point coordinates Qql Shift angle at start of thread cutting 0 000 to 360 000 Ee Thread number per inch The tables below indicate the thread number M system Metric command Least input Thread number increment command range Least input Thread number increment command range mm thread inch 0
292. ting feed rate e Cutting Feed Rate setting range Least input increment Metric input 1 1000000 mm min min 1 100000 mm min min Least input increment B 0 001 mm 0 0001 inch Least input increment C 0 0001 mm 0 00001 inch e The cutting feed rate is effective for G01 G02 G03 G33 commands etc As to others refer to interpolation specifications Il 22 4 Feed 4 1 Feed Rate 4 1 3 Manual Feed Rate m min M system 1000 L system 1000 The manual feed rates are designated as the feed rate in jog mode or incremental feed mode for manual operation and the feed rate during dry run ON for automatic operation The manual feed rates are set using external signals The manual feed rate signals from the PLC includes two methods the code method and numerical value method Which method to be applied is determined with a signal common to the entire system The signals used by these methods are common to all axes e Setting range under the code method Metric input 0 00 to 14000 00 mm min 31 steps Inch input 0 000 to 551 000 inch min 31 steps e Setting range under the value setting method Metric input O to 1000000 00 mm min in 0 01 mm min increments Inch input 0 to 39370 inch min in 0 001 inch min increments Multiplication factor PCF1 and PCF2 are available with the value setting method 4 1 4 Rotary Axis Command Speed Tenfold M system O L system O This function multiplies the rotary axis command speed by
293. tion Spindle phase synchronization Spindle synchronous rotation direction Phase shift calculation request Phase offset request Error temporary cancel PLC axis near point detection 1st axis PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis PLC axis near point detection 4th axis PLC axis near point detection 5th axis PLC axis near point detection 6th axis PLC axis near point detection 7th axis PLC axis near point detection 8th axis PLC axis control valid 1st axis PLC axis control valid 2nd axis PLC axis control valid 3rd axis PLC axis control valid 4th axis PLC axis control valid 5th axis PLC axis control valid 6th axis PLC axis control valid 7th axis PLC axis control valid 8th axis Download request APLC output signal 1 32 Axis Command Control axis detach Servo OFF Mirror image External deceleration External deceleration Automatic interlock Automatic interlock Manual interlock Manual interlock Automatic machine lock Manual machine lock Feed axis selection Feed axis selection Manual Automatic simultaneous valid Control axis detach 2 Current limit changeover Droop release request Zero point initialization set mode Zero point initialization set start Unclamp completion Multi step speed monitor request Multi step speed monitor mode input 1 Multi step speed monitor mode input 2 Counter zero PLC axis switching Stop monitor request Brake test start Part
294. tor Waveform Display Following chapter were deleted from Il FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 17 1 1 Built in PLC Processing Mode Date of revision Manual No Revision details Dec 2010 IB NA 1500259 E Revised contents in order to support C70 software C5 version Added the Specifications list Updated the contents of I GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Following chapters were added to II FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 4 Max number of PLC indexing axes 1 3 102 High speed program server mode 5 1 1 7 1000kB 2560m 1000 programs 5 1 1 8 2000kB 5120m 1000 programs 5 2 4 Word editing 8 1 7 Spindle position control Spindle C axis control 17 3 5 PLC axis indexing 17 7 4 APLC release Need separate PC S W Following chapters were deleted from II FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 17 5 Machine contact input output 17 6 102 MELSEC multiple CPU system Following chapter Nos were changed 17 8 2 101 Remote monitor tool 17 8 2 1 in the former version 17 8 102 200 Cycle Monitor Waveform Display 17 8 3 in the former version Jan 2012 IB NA 1500259 F Added Handling of our product Mistakes were corrected Jun 2012 IB NA 1500259 G Revised contents in order to support C70 software D4 version Precautions for Safety was updated The Specifications list was updated GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS was updated 4 5 8 High speed synchronous tapping OMR DD of Il FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS was rewritten Followin
295. uct etc 3 Even during the term of warranty repair costs shall be charged to the customer in the following cases a a failure caused by improper storage or handling carelessness or negligence etc or a failure caused by the customer s hardware or software problem b a failure caused by any alteration etc to the product made by the customer without Mitsubishi Electric s approval c a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if the customer s equipment in which this product is incorporated is equipped with a safety device required by applicable laws or has any function or structure considered to be indispensable in the light of common sense in the industry d a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual etc are duly maintained and replaced e any replacement of consumable parts including a battery relay and fuse f a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of voltage and acts of God including without limitation earthquake lightning and natural disasters g a failure which is unforeseeable under technologies available at the time of shipment of this product from our company h any other failures which we are not responsible for or which the customer acknowledges we are not responsible for 2 Service in Overseas Countries If the customer installs the product purchased from us in his
296. uired Relief amount at cut bottom d If sign is not provided relief is made at the first cut bottom If sign is provided relief is made not at the first cut bottom but at the second cut bottom and later Feed rate I S start point e 9 and 12 just before the last cycle are executed with the remaining distance e 2 4 6 8 10 11 and 12 are executed at the rapid traverse feedrate Il 131 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 7 Multiple repetitive thread cutting cycle G76 When the thread cutting start and end points are commanded cut at any desired angle can be made by automatically cutting so that the cut section area cutting torque per time becomes constant in the G76 fixed cycle Various longitudinal threads can be cut by considering the thread cutting end point coordinate and taper height constituent command value Command Format Pmra Rd X U ZW Ri Pk Qad FI Cut count at finishing 01 to 99 modal Chamfering amount 00 to 99 modal Set in 0 1 lead increments Nose angle included angle of thread 00 to 99 modal Set in 1 degree increments Finishing allowance modal X axis end point coordinate of thread part Designate the X coordinate of the end point in the thread part in an absolute or incremental value Z axis end point coordinate of thread part Designate the Z coordinate of the end point in the thread part
297. ules are mounted 50 2 General Specifications 2 7 Dual Signal Module 3 NCIO Connector for I O signals controlled by NCCPU Q173NCCPU IN LID Nc x10_ OS IN IN IN IN IN NC X05_ N N N N SEA IN NC X11 SEAN NC X12 SPAIN NC X13 SCA IN NC X14 SEA IN NC X15 SPAIN NC X16_ SERA IN NC X17 SPAIN NC X18 SEA IN NC X19 1A10 ENIES 1A08 1A07 1A06 1A05 Ooo Ey a EPA AS 24vpc comi 24VDC COM1 1404 1403 o 1A02 OV COM2 1A01 TST OV COM2 DC24V DC26 4V DC28 8V 10 20 30 40 50 55 C Temperature a Note 1 Output pins with allow 0 2A output Other pins have 0 1A output Note 2 Pins with signal names NC YOA and NC X0A are the output signals controlled by CNC CPU When any of the signals is output to YOA the signal is input to XOA as a feedback signal Note 3 The device Nos written above are for the assignment on hardware These Nos are different from the device Nos to be actually used 51 2 General Specifications 2 7 Dual Signal Module 4 PLCIO Connector for I O signals controlled by PLCCPU ANnUDHCPU IN JrLc x00 DOAN PLC X10 2820 2A20 IN PLc xoi Mit IN PLO X11_ a 2A19 IN _ PLc x0o2 Sin OO PLO X12 zara m m ES mo PLc xos E m pen A A no pioxo EN n poxa a a IN pte x05 ANE n Pexe 7 2814 2A14 In PLC xo6
298. umed to be designated Finish shape start sequence number If it is omitted the program top is assumed to be designated Finish shape end sequence number If it is omitted the program end is assumed to be designated However if M99 precedes the Q command up to M99 a The F S and T commands in the rough cutting cycle command G71 to G73 blocks are ignored and the F S and T commands in the finish shape program become effective b The memory address of the finish shape program executed by G71 to G72 is not stored Whenever G70 is executed a program search is made c When the G70 cycle terminates the tool returns to the start point at the rapid traverse feed rate and the next block is read Example 1 Sequence No designation N100 G70 P200 Q3007 N110 N120 N200 Finish shape program N300 N310 Example 2 Program No designation N100 G70 A100 r G01 X100 Z50 FO5 M99 In either example 1 or 2 after the N100 cycle is executed the N110 block is executed Il 129 12 Program Support Functions 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions 5 Face cutting off cycle G74 When the slotting end point coordinates cut depth cutting tool shift amount and cutting tool relief amount at the cut bottom are commanded automatic slotting is performed in the end face direction of a given bar by G74 fixed cycle The machining program is commanded as follows G74 Re G74 X U Re X U Z
299. unit except MDS DJ Se ries battery box Note The battery box side is connected using a bare conductor or a terminal bar 0 3 0 5 1 5 For servo drive unit except MDS DJ Se ries battery box Note The battery box side is connected using a bare conductor or a terminal bar 0 3 0 5 1 5 3 BKS1CBLoM A1 H ADS lt 200V Series gt BKS1CBLoM 2 3 5 7 10 reverse load side angle A2 H Brake cable for HF KP ie lt 200V Series gt PWS1CBLoM 2 3 5 7 10 load side angle A1 H Power cable for HF KP no lt 200V Series gt reverse load side angle eat Power cable for HF KP ASRI NO Note It can not be used with HF KP13 10m 2 3 5 7 10 load side angle Power supply communication ca ble Power backup unit communica 0 35 0 5 1 2 3 5 10 15 tion cable 20 30 Cable for Auxiliary axis Servo drive unit Note The Standard cable length column shows the lengths of the cable available from MITSUBISHI 19 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 27 Relay terminal unit a Unit Relay Terminal Module User s Manual Hardware A6TE2 16SRN IB NA 66833 40 pin connector A6TE2 16SRN For 24VDC Transistor output unit sink type module Model mame amar O Remco podra ei BNA 66833 28 Extension cable Model name Remarks Reference QCO5B 0 45m cable QCO06B 0 6m cable QCPU User s Manual QC12B 1 2m cable Hardware Design 00508 SNA 080483ENG QC100B 1
300. ut 1 It stops operations All the axes decelerate and stop The spindle also stops 2 The complete standby status is established 3 After all the servo axes and the spindle have stopped the ready OFF status is established However the servo ready finish signal SA is not set to OFF When a door is closed After the PLC has confirmed that the door has been closed and locked the NC system operates as follows when the door open signal is set to OFF 4 All the axes are set to ready ON 5 The door open enable signal is set to OFF Resuming operation 6 When automatic operation was underway The door open signal is set to OFF and after the ready ON status has been established for all the axes operation is resumed 7 When manual operation was underway Axis movement is commenced when the axis movement signals are input again 8 Spindle rotation Restore the spindle rotation by inputting the forward rotation or reverse rotation signal again Note 1 Concerning the handling of an analog spindle The signals described in this section are valid in a system with serial connections for the NC control unit and drive units When an analog spindle is connected the NC system cannot verify that the spindle has come to a complete stop This means that the door should be opened after the PLC has verified that the spindle has come to a complete stop Since the spindle may resume its rotation immediately after the door has been closed set t
301. ut Output M system O L system O 7 1 4 Parameter Input Output M system O L system O 7 1 5 History Data Output M system O L system O Il 51 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 1 Spindle Functions S 8 1 1 Spindle Control Functions The spindle rotation speed is determined in consideration of the override and gear ratio for the S command given in automatic operation or with manual numerical commands and the spindle is rotated The following diagram shows an outline of the spindle control When an 8 digit number following address S S 99999999 to S99999999 is commanded a signed 32 bit binary data and start signal will be output to the PLC When multiple spindle control Sn method up to seven sets of S commands can be commanded in one block Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all S commands NC PLC ihe a Machining program analysis Manual numerical command S command value Start signal Spindle rotation cents command S digtt BIN Spindle rotation 5 digit BIN command Spindle controller MDS D DH SP Spindle output i command creation Gear selection series etc Override Gear ratio Max rotation speed Parameter 1 The override can be designated as 50 to 120 in 10 increments or 0 to 200 in 1 increments The override is not changed whil
302. utomatic operation memory MDI or by a manual numerical command the signal of this function is output It is turned OFF after the miscellaneous function finishes or by the Reset amp Rewind signal Machining program M code independent output Response to controller MOO Fin1 or Fin2 Fint or Fin2 If movement or dwell command exists in the same block as these M commands this signal is output upon completion of the movement or dwell command Il 61 8 Spindle Tool and Miscellaneous Functions 8 3 Miscellaneous Functions M 8 3 4 Miscellaneous Function Finish M system O L system O These signals inform the CNC system that a miscellaneous function M spindle function S tool function T or 2nd miscellaneous function A B C has been assigned and that the PLC which has received it has completed the required operation They include miscellaneous function finish signal 1 FIN1 and miscellaneous function finish signal 2 FIN2 Miscellaneous function finish signal 1 FIN1 When the controller checks that FIN1 is ON it sets the function strobes OFF Furthermore when the PLC checks that the function strobes are OFF it sets FIN1 OFF The controller checks that FIN1 is OFF and advances to the next block Below is an example of a time chart applying when a miscellaneous function has been assigned Command X Next block Miscellaneous function strobe MF A Miscellaneous function finish signal FIN1 Miscellaneous
303. utput between dog2 and dog1 dog1 dog2 y PA dog2 Signal is output at the dog1 dog2 position Il 214 17 Machine Support Functions 17 2 Machine Construction 17 2 101 Multi secondary axis Synchronous Control M system A L system Multi secondary axis synchronous control function serves to drive 2 or more secondary axes in synchronization with travel commands for the primary axis It can be used in instances such as when operating a machine that has a normal line control axis as its primary axis and multiple normal line axes in parallel to the primary axis Up to 3 groups of axes including standard synchronously controlled axes can be simultaneously operated at one time The number of secondary axes is subject to the maximum number of axes allowed for each part system 1 2 Synchronous control Synchronous Synchronous control mode operation method Independent Correction mode operation method Synchronous control mode The following two operation methods are available in the synchronous control mode a Synchronous operation Designated axes among the primary axis and secondary axes will move in synchronization with commands for the primary axis Either all axes or a one given axis can be designated Primary axis must always be designated b Independent operation Axes that are not designated for synchronous operation will independently move with their own travel commands If no axes are des
304. utput power supply 5VDC Output current 8 5A Note Out of production 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 3 PLC CPU Modelmame Remas JO Rerne Ethernet built in type Program capacity 100k steps QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Q03UDVCPU High speed type Program capacity 30k steps SH NA 080483ENG Note Q04UDVCPU High speed type Program capacity 40k steps Note QO6UDVCPU High speed type Program capacity 60k steps Note Q13UDVCPU High speed type Program capacity 130k steps Note Q26UDVCPU High speed type Program capacity 260k steps Note Note The High Speed Universal model is compatible with the safety observation function but not yet certified under the European safety standards EN ISO 13849 1 Cat3 PL d or EN62061 SIL CL2 by TUV 4 CNC CPU module Modelmame Remarks OOOO Q173NCCPU S01 CNC CPU module One each of following accessories are provided Battery kit Battery holder unit Connection cable 0 5m Q173NCBATC Q170DBATC Battery Q6BAT 5 Battery holder unit Modelname Remaks Q173NCBATC Battery holder unit l 4 1 System Configuration 1 3 Component Modules 6 Input module a AC 16 points 100 to 120VAC QX10 8mA 100VAC 60Hz 7mA 100VAC 50Hz Response time 20ms 16 points common 18 point terminal block I O module Type Building 8 points 100 to 240VAC Block Users Manual 17mA 200VAC 60Hz SH NA 080042 QX28 14mA 200VAC 50Hz
305. ven below G53 G90 G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 G53 Coordinate system selection G90 Incremental absolute commands G00 Movement mode M system Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 End point coordinate on the machine coordinate system If the incremental or absolute commands and movement mode have been omitted operation complies with the modal command that prevails at the time G53 movement on machine coordinate system is an unmodal command which is effective only in the block where it is assigned The workpiece coordinate system being selected is not changed by this command gt a Machine coordinate system G53 M 1st reference point Workpiece coordinate system 1 G54 G53 G90 GOO X0 YO Il 75 10 Coordinate System 10 1 Coordinate System Type and Setting 10 1 2 Coordinate System Setting M system O L system O By giving a G92 command the program coordinate system zero point of program can be changed on the workpiece coordinate system When a coordinate system setting is assigned using the G92 command the G92 offset amount is applied so that the machine position in the current workpiece coordinate system is set to the coordinate values assigned by the G92 command as shown in the figure below and the workpiece coordinate systems are shifted accordingly The machine does nat run and all the workpiece coordinate systems from G54 to G59 referenced to the machine coordinate system or the external workpiece coordinate system if t
306. ween the coordinates when the tool has stopped and the command coordinates lt registers this difference as the tool length offset amount for that tool M system A L system A 1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement M system This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by the commanded value between the measurement start position to the measurement position it stops the tool as soon as it contacts the sensor and calculates the difference between the coordinates when the tool has stopped and commanded coordinates It registers this difference as the tool length offset amount for that tool If compensation has already been applied to the tool it is moved in the direction of the measurement position with the compensation still applied and when the measurement and calculation results are such that a further compensation amount is to be provided the current compensation amount is further corrected If the compensation amount at this time is one type the compensation amount is automatically corrected if there is a distinction between the tool length compensation amount and wear compensation amount the wear amount is automatically corrected G37 Z RD F_s Measurement axis address and measurement position coordinate X Y Z a where a is an optional axis The distance between the point at which tool movement is to start at the measurement speed and the measurement position The range in which the tool
307. ws the user generated C language module to be called from NC Control operations that are difficult to express in a sequence program can be created with C language APLC release is activated between NC processings so that the processing frequency is not guaranteed Hardware configuration This function will be activated by installing C language module into a built in FROM The installation requires the Remote Monitor Tool Software configuration The names of directory file and initialize function where C language modules are stored are fixed 17 8 Others 17 8 2 CNC Remote Operation Tool 17 8 2 101 Remote Monitor Tool M system O L system O CNC remote operation tool is a PC compatible software tool that monitors information in NC unit connected with the Ethernet Downloadable from the Factory Automation Systems section of MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC s website 17 8 3 Automatic Operation Lock M system A L system A Automatic operation lock function prevents falsification of a C language module herein after APLC by a third party If an illegal APLC is installed automatic operation will be prohibited by requiring authentication with the APLC authentication password which has been registered to the NC unit beforehand using this function Refer to 17 7 4 APLC Release for details on the APLC II 227 Revision History pate ot rote Manusi Ne Revision details Dec 2006 A 1500259 A First edition created Jan 2007 A 1500259
308. y upon completion of the fixed cycle machining operation G98 Initial point level return G99 R point level return The basic program format for the fixed cycle commands is shown below Yy1 221 Rr Qq1 Pp1 LI1 FA Hole drilling mode Hole position data X axis Y axis hole drilling position command rapid traverse incremental absolute Hole machining data Hole bottom position designation incremental absolute Hole machining data Hole R point designation incremental absolute Hole machining data Depth of cut per pass in G73 G83 cycle incremental Shift amount in G76 G87 cycle Depth of cut per pass in pecking tapping deep hole tapping of G74 G84 cycle Hole machining data Dwell time at hole bottom Hole machining data Number of fixed cycle repetitions Cutting feed rate For details on the synchronous tapping cycle refer to the section 4 5 3 Synchronous Tapping Il 111 12 Program Support Functions G73 Step cycle G74 Reverse tapping cycle G98 mode G98 mode Initial point R point Z point G82 Drilling counterboring cycle G83 Deep hole drilling cycle G98 mode tial poi G98 mode Initial point R point R point q Initial point q Z point G99 mode Dwell G99 mode G86 Boring cycle G87 Back boring cycle Initial point MOS G98 mode Initial point MO3 R point Z point 12 1 Machining Method Support Functions G76 G81 Fine boring cycle Drilli
309. y1 Zz1 Return control axes interim point Each axis is first positioned by rapid traverse to the position interim point assigned for the assigned axis and then is returned independently to the 1st reference point The G29 programming format is given below G29 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 G29 Return command Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Return control axes assigned position The tool is first moved by rapid traverse to the interim position which is passed through with G28 or G30 and is then positioned by rapid traverse at the position assigned by the program 1st reference point Non interpolation G28 movement ere G28 a Y Interpolation or non interpolation can be Interim selected oe G29 Interpolation or non interpolation can G29 if be selected II 85 10 Coordinate System 10 2 Return If the position detector is for the incremental detection system the first reference point return for the first time after the NC power has been turned ON will be the dog type However the second and subsequent returns are to be the high speed type The high speed type is always used when the position detector is for the absolute position detection system Note 1 The automatic 1st reference point return pattern is the same as for manual reference point return Note 2 The number of axes for which reference point return can be performed simultaneously depends on the number of simultaneously controlled axes Note 3 If at the time

C70 Specifications Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents